RescueNet FireRMS Administrator Guide

RescueNet FireRMS Administrator Guide
RescueNet FireRMS
Administrator Guide
Software version 4.9
© 2011 by ZOLL Data Systems. All rights reserved.
RescueNet is a registered trademark of ZOLL Data Systems. RescueNet CommCAD, RescueNet Dispatch,
RescueNet DispatchPro, RescueNet Billing, RescueNet TabletPCR, RescueNet Nomad, RescueNet Crew
Scheduler, RescueNet Resource Planner, NetTransit.com, RescueNet Web Viewer, RescueNet WebPCR,
and RescueNet Code Review are trademarks of ZOLL Data Systems.
ZOLL is a registered trademark of ZOLL Medical Corporation. M Series, E Series, AED Plus, and AED
Pro are trademarks of ZOLL Medical Corporation.
Other product and company names may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Preface
Introduction to FireRMS ....................................................................................................xi
Documentation Set ......................................................................................................xi
About This Guide ............................................................................................................ xii
Book Conventions .......................................................................................................... xiii
Typographical Conventions ..................................................................................... xiii
Information Highlighting and Cross-References ..................................................... xiii
Organization ....................................................................................................................xiv
1-1
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
Incidents, Training, Other Entries, Daybook and Documents ................................. 1-3
Additional FireRMS Modules.................................................................................. 1-4
Additional Enterprise Tools ..................................................................................... 1-6
Meaning of Color In Fields ...................................................................................... 1-6
Changing the Desktop Font Size.............................................................................. 1-6
Setup Overview .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Setting Up Additional Modules ............................................................................... 1-8
Customizing Module Selections ..................................................................................... 1-9
Determining The Data Your Personnel Can View ....................................................... 1-10
Filtering Data ......................................................................................................... 1-10
Filtering Data By Department Level ............................................................... 1-10
Filtering Data Using Desktop Settings ............................................................ 1-12
Setting Responsibility Levels for the Personnel and Roster Modules ................... 1-12
Restricting Access to Data ..................................................................................... 1-13
Customizing Data................................................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 2: Installing FireRMS
Installing FireRMS .........................................................................................................
Installing FireRMS Client Software.........................................................................
Installing FireRMS Server Software........................................................................
Security for Crystal Reports.....................................................................................
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-5
iii
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
3-1
Entering Department Information............................................................................. 3-1
Entering Basic Department Information ............................................................ 3-1
Setting Up The Department Structure................................................................ 3-4
Entering Department Shift Patterns ................................................................... 3-6
Customizing Codes................................................................................................. 3-10
Entering Department Codes ............................................................................. 3-10
Entering 901 Sub-Codes .................................................................................. 3-12
Entering EMS Codes........................................................................................ 3-14
Viewing or Adding Chemical Codes ............................................................... 3-15
Adding Apparatus and Staffing Apparatus............................................................. 3-18
Adding Personnel.................................................................................................... 3-21
Entering and Restricting Employee Contact Information ................................ 3-23
Entering Cities ........................................................................................................ 3-25
Entering Numbers for Cities ............................................................................ 3-26
Entering Streets....................................................................................................... 3-28
Entering Block Ranges for a Street .................................................................. 3-30
Creating Security Groups and Defining Access Rights ................................................ 3-31
Creating Personnel Security Settings ............................................................................ 3-33
Applying Exclusions for Security Groups .................................................................... 3-33
Creating Local Help ...................................................................................................... 3-33
Exporting and Importing Local Help across Multiple Databases........................... 3-34
4-1
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
Customizing Hydrants..................................................................................................... 4-2
Creating Hydrant Actions ......................................................................................... 4-2
Selecting Staff To Be Assigned Hydrant Activities ................................................. 4-3
Selecting a Hydrant Numbering Scheme.................................................................. 4-5
Customizing Occupancies ............................................................................................... 4-6
Setting a Default View For the Occupancies Activities Tab .................................... 4-6
Creating a List of Building-Related Actions ............................................................ 4-7
Creating a List of Occupancy Findings .................................................................... 4-8
Entering Staff Available for Occupancy Assignments ............................................. 4-9
Creating a List of Occupancy-Related Permits ...................................................... 4-11
Creating a List of Standards Linked to Occupancy Findings ................................. 4-12
Sharing Occupancy Information Between Databases............................................. 4-13
Creating Groups and Assigning Building Codes.................................................... 4-13
Creating Templates for Occupancy-Related Letters............................................... 4-16
Choosing an Occupancy Numbering Scheme ........................................................ 4-19
Customizing Incidents................................................................................................... 4-20
iv
Table of Contents
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Setting Billing Rates For Incidents ........................................................................
Selecting Aid Given Codes Forms.........................................................................
Selecting Default Settings ......................................................................................
Mapping EMS Translation Codes..........................................................................
Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations.......................................................
Creating Equipment or Facilities Categories .........................................................
Setting Default Measurement Units .......................................................................
Creating a List of Equipment Actions....................................................................
Creating Staff or Department Structures Available For Assignments ...................
Defining Additional Roles for your Personnel .............................................................
Customizing Training ...................................................................................................
Adding Sub-Categories and Creating Standards....................................................
Creating a List of Objectives and Skills.................................................................
Creating Classes .....................................................................................................
Creating Credentials...............................................................................................
Setting Up Default Objectives and Skills...............................................................
Recording Objectives and Skills Achievements for Participants...........................
Customizing Default Results Fields .............................................................................
Setting Up the Class Explorer Default Results ......................................................
Setting Up the Objective Explorer Default Results ...............................................
Customizing Advanced EMS Protocols .......................................................................
Creating Advanced EMS Disclosures ..........................................................................
Preventing Unauthorized Users from Viewing Patient Data on EMS Reports ............
Customizing Other Entries ...........................................................................................
Customizing Default Results for Other Entries .....................................................
Customizing Tabs: Labels, Sort Order, Visibility ........................................................
Creating Custom Tabs ..................................................................................................
Modifying Published or Saved Custom Tabs.........................................................
Changing the Tab Order of Objects .......................................................................
Changing Object Properties For All Modules ..............................................................
Selecting Mandatory and Recommended
Fields, Repositioning Fields, or Changing Visibility..........................................................
Changing Field Labels or Visibility.......................................................................
Assigning Default Values to Data Elements ..........................................................
4-20
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-38
4-43
4-43
4-44
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-47
4-49
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-56
4-57
4-58
4-59
4-61
4-62
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
Setting the Default Desktop............................................................................................
Using NT Logins ............................................................................................................
Enabling and Disabling System Lockouts for Invalid Logons.......................................
Enabling Login Security/Protecting Daybook and Desktop...........................................
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
v
Turning On/Off the Welcome Wizard...................................................................... 5-3
Disabling Automatic Incident Numbers.......................................................................... 5-3
Turning Off the Refresh Timer ....................................................................................... 5-4
Setting up the System Inactivity Timer........................................................................... 5-4
Locking Completed Records and Creating Supplemental Records ................................ 5-5
Protecting the Daily Roster and Personnel Module ........................................................ 5-6
Setting the Date Format................................................................................................... 5-6
Selecting a Default Personnel Explorer .......................................................................... 5-7
Activating Design Mode ................................................................................................. 5-8
Using an Alternate Spell Check Dictionary .................................................................... 5-9
Creating and Updating a Custom Dictionary ................................................................ 5-10
Sharing the dictionary with FireRMS Mobile Users..................................................... 5-10
Setting Local/Centralized Reporting............................................................................. 5-11
Setting Central Reporting For Department Personnel ............................................ 5-13
Displaying Mandatory and Recommended Fields ........................................................ 5-14
Sharing System-wide Messages and Notifications Using FYI ..................................... 5-15
Using the EMS Module Filters for Incidents ................................................................ 5-16
6-1
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
Viewing System Information .......................................................................................... 6-1
Changing System Settings............................................................................................... 6-3
Changing Additional System Settings ...................................................................... 6-7
Changing a User’s Login Information .......................................................................... 6-13
7-1
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
FireRMS Mobile Setup Overview................................................................................... 7-1
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software ........................................................................ 7-2
Setting Security on Mobile Devices ......................................................................... 7-4
Database Synchronization for FireRMS
Mobile on Windows XP with a Firewall ............................................................................... 7-4
Enabling Mobile Filtering and File Transfer ............................................................ 7-5
Mobile Filtering and File Transfer Options.............................................................. 7-5
Allowing Users to Create Incident or Occupancy Records From a Mobile Device. 7-6
Options for Customizing FireRMS Mobile .............................................................. 7-7
Creating Individualized Signature Files for Inspection Reports ........................ 7-7
Synchronizing with Physio-Control LIFEPAK Defibrillator ................................... 7-9
Customizing the Mobile Dashboard ......................................................................... 7-9
Moving FireRMS Reports to Mobile for Dashboard.............................................. 7-10
A-1
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
Access Rights Definitions .............................................................................................. A-1
vi
Table of Contents
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Appendix B: Example Department Structures
B-1
Large Agency ........................................................................................................... B-1
Moderate Agency ..................................................................................................... B-3
Small Agency ........................................................................................................... B-4
C-1
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands.................................... C-2
Apparatus ................................................................................................................. C-2
Cities ........................................................................................................................ C-3
City Numbers ........................................................................................................... C-5
Streets....................................................................................................................... C-6
Billing....................................................................................................................... C-7
Aid Given Codes ...................................................................................................... C-9
Training .................................................................................................................. C-11
Training Credentials ........................................................................................ C-11
Training Objectives/Skills ............................................................................... C-12
Training Classes .............................................................................................. C-14
Occupancies ........................................................................................................... C-16
Hydrants ................................................................................................................. C-17
Vehicles and Equipment ........................................................................................ C-19
Locations ......................................................................................................... C-20
Tab Creator............................................................................................................. C-20
Customizing Fields for Incident,
Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms ...................................................................... C-22
Incidents Form ....................................................................................................... C-22
Response Time ................................................................................................ C-22
Locations ......................................................................................................... C-24
Persons Involved.............................................................................................. C-27
Highway........................................................................................................... C-29
Aircraft Involved ............................................................................................. C-30
Resources......................................................................................................... C-32
Fire................................................................................................................... C-34
Structure........................................................................................................... C-38
Hazmat............................................................................................................. C-43
Arson ............................................................................................................... C-50
Casualty ........................................................................................................... C-55
Advanced EMS................................................................................................ C-64
Wildland .......................................................................................................... C-82
Narrative .......................................................................................................... C-87
Authorization ................................................................................................... C-88
vii
Training Form........................................................................................................ C-90
Training Definition.......................................................................................... C-90
Training Participants ....................................................................................... C-92
Training Objectives/Skills............................................................................... C-94
Training Authorization.................................................................................... C-95
Other Entries Form ................................................................................................ C-97
Other Entries Definition.................................................................................. C-97
Other Entries Participants ............................................................................... C-99
Other Entries Authorization .......................................................................... C-101
Daybook Form ..................................................................................................... C-102
Customizing Fields for Daily Roster, Personnel, Occupancies, Hydrants,
and Vehicles and Equipment ............................................................................................ C-103
Daily Roster ......................................................................................................... C-103
Personnel Info...................................................................................................... C-105
Hydrants............................................................................................................... C-112
Occupancies......................................................................................................... C-118
Vehicles & Equipment......................................................................................... C-133
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers........................................................... C-143
Agency Finder ..................................................................................................... C-143
Apparatus Finder ................................................................................................. C-144
Hydrants Assignment Explorer............................................................................ C-145
Occupancies Assignments Explorer .................................................................... C-146
Vehicles Assignment Explorer ............................................................................ C-147
City Finder ........................................................................................................... C-148
Credentials Earned Explorer................................................................................ C-150
External Participants............................................................................................ C-151
Occupancy Finder Explorer................................................................................. C-152
Incident Filter....................................................................................................... C-153
Occupancy Finder................................................................................................ C-154
Storage Tanks ...................................................................................................... C-155
Street Finder......................................................................................................... C-157
Training Filter...................................................................................................... C-158
D-1
Appendix D: Setting up the Master Name Index Feature
Setting Up the Master Name Index Feature ............................................................ D-1
Using the Master Name Index Feature .................................................................... D-2
Appendix E: Quick Reference
E-1
Appendix F: Getting Help
E-1
Technical support .......................................................................................................... E-1
viii
Table of Contents
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Technical support is available to help in these areas ...............................................
Areas outside the scope of technical support ...........................................................
Your maintenance contract ......................................................................................
Contact information .................................................................................................
Custom solutions ............................................................................................................
E-1
E-1
E-2
E-2
E-2
Index
ix
x
Table of Contents
Preface
Welcome to FireRMS™. The FireRMS Administrator’s Guide describes how to install and
configure the 4.9 version of the FireRMS software suite.
Introduction to FireRMS
FireRMS is the most advanced Fire Department Records Management System (RMS) on the
market. It is a NFIRS 5.0-compliant Incident Reporting software program that has been specifically
developed to dramatically cut report completion time for front-line officers and enhance data
security.
Two versions of FireRMS are available:
FireRMS Standard Edition - Provides the basic elements for records management,
including Incident Reporting, Training, Station Roster, and Personnel
FireRMS Enterprise Edition - Includes additional features such as occupancy module,
hydrants with flow calculation, advanced EMS, vehicles and equipment, scheduling and
tracking, a daybook module, a HazMat database and query tools. The Enterprise version
also includes advanced management capabilities not found in the Standard edition of the
product.
The FireRMS Mobile™ software is available as an add-on to the FireRMS Enterprise
Edition. This software enables you to collect data while away from the fire station using a
laptop or a PC tablet and merge it into the database when you return.
Documentation Set
The documentation set for the FireRMS software consists of the following:
FireRMS User’s Guide
Describes the FireRMS desktop and how to filter data.
Contains step-by-step procedures for reporting Incidents, using the Daybook, the Daily
Roster, Other Entries, printing reports, and creating Incident or Occupancy queries. Also,
describes how to use the following modules: Training, Occupancies, Hydrants, Vehicles &
Equipment, Personnel, and Scheduling and Tracking.
xi
FireRMS
Supplies and Inventory Guide
Describes how to configure and use the FireRMS Supplies and Inventory add-on
application. The FireRMS Supplies and Inventory application enables you to store your fire
equipment and supplies inventory in a database.
FireRMS Maintenance & Work Orders Online Help
Describes how to configure and use the FireRMS M&WO add-on application. The M&WO
application enables you to schedule, track, test, and manage department equipment and
apparatus.
Online Help
Contains online Help files that describe the user interface.
RescueNet FireRMS NEMSIS User Guide
Describes how you can collect EMS and demographics data required by the National EMS
Information System (NEMSIS).
RescueNet FireRMS LOSAP Setup and Usage Guide
Describes how to implement and track the Length of Service (LOSAP) Award Program.
About This Guide
The Fire RMS Administrator’s Guide is written for system administrators who perform the
following tasks:
Install and configure the FireRMS system
Enter department and personnel information
Customize input fields for personnel
Control user access
System administrators can disable and enable functions, and set limits on the range of the functions
found in the software. They have access to personnel information and logs and are responsible for
maintaining this information.
This guide assumes that the system administrator is familiar with basic PC functions such as
changing to a different directory, editing and saving files, copying files to and from diskettes, and
printing files.
xii
Preface
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Book Conventions
This section describes:
Typographical
Information
conventions
highlighting and cross-references
Typographical Conventions
This guide contains the following typographical conventions:
Appearance
Description
italics
Terms first defined, and emphasis.
bold regular
Descriptions of user interface elements such as buttons, tabs, icons, folders,
directories, filenames, window text, etc. All displayed case-sensitive.
Information Highlighting and Cross-References
This guide contains the following information highlighting and cross-references:
Note: Identifies important points, hints, special circumstances, or alternative methods.
Caution: Cautions the user regarding actions that may result in important system changes,
operational issues, security issues, overwriting data, or data loss.
Warning: Warns the user regarding actions that may result in physical damage to the
system, actions that may be hazardous to the user, or actions that will disrupt
communications between the server and clients.
Cross-references indicate the location of additional information regarding the chosen topic.
References may include headings on specific pages, entire chapters, or other guides.
When viewing the documentation online through Adobe® Acrobat®, click the cross-reference to
display the referenced section.
Book Conventions
xiii
Organization
The FireRMS Administrator Guide is organized as follows:
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
Provides an overview of the FireRMS system, describes the configuration procedures you must
perform to use FireRMS, describes how FireRMS filtering works, and lists the FireRMS Mobile
setup steps.
Chapter 2: Installing FireRMS
Describes the installation procedure that the system administrator must follow to install FireRMS
or FireRMS Mobile.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
Contains the detailed procedures the System Administrator follows to perform initial setup.
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
Contains the detailed procedures needed to set up the additional FireRMS modules. You only need
to customize those modules you intend on using. These include Hydrants, Occupancies, Incidents,
Training, and Classes.
Chapter 5: Controlling User Access
Describes how to control user access. This information includes how to set a default desktop,
encrypt patient data, limit access to Personnel and Roster details, activate design mode, set
centralized reporting, and display mandatory/recommended fields.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
Describes how to change your System Settings. These include changing the system preferences,
changing a user’s login, and setting values used on a Mobile device.
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
Describes how to use the FireRMS Mobile module.
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
Contains tables listing all the security objects to which you can assign your group levels of access.
You can assign access using the Access Rights command.
Appendix B: Example Department Structures
Contains diagrams used to define the department structure. The diagrams identify the relationships
among Division, Battalion and Station.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Contains tables describing how to customize field values in text boxes, list boxes, and drop-down
list boxes by adding to or removing items from the categories.
xiv
Preface
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Appendix D: Setting up the Master Name Index Feature
Describes how to set up and use the Master Name Index (MNI) feature available with FireRMS 4.5
SP 1 and later.
Appendix E: Quick Reference
Lists quick reference questions for all major procedures in alphabetical order.
Appendix F: Contacting ZOLL
Describes how to contact ZOLL for product support.
Organization
xv
xvi
Preface
1
1
Chapter 1:
FireRMS Overview
The FireRMS Enterprise Edition is the most advanced Fire Department Records Management
System (FRMS) on the market. It is a National Fire Information Council (NFIRS) 5.0-compliant
Incident Reporting software program that has been specifically developed to enhance data security
and to dramatically reduce report completion time for front-line officers.
FireRMS is built on Microsoft, and Microsoft SQL Server technology; a client-server database
management system.
Figure 1-1 displays the main FireRMS desktop window. Seven main buttons and four main tabs are
displayed at the top of the window. When you select these buttons or tabs, you can enter/view all
essential department information.
Note: A Reconcile tab may also be displayed on your desktop. This tab can be used by a
designated person to reconcile new incidents entered on a mobile device or incidents
updated on a mobile device.
For information about using Reconcile, see the FireRMS User’s Guide.
1-1
Figure 1-1: Main FireRMS Desktop Window
The optional FireRMS Mobile™ module is only available with the FireRMS Enterprise Edition.
FireRMS Mobile utilizes Microsoft merge replication technology to enable mobile users complete
access to critical FireRMS data in the field using a laptop or Tablet PC. The laptop or Tablet PC is
either connected to, or disconnected from their network. The following features support FireRMS
Mobile:
Mobile
Preferences - Includes Administrative options to manage the FireRMS Mobile
client; allow users to create new incidents or occupancies on a mobile device, or select the
number of incidents on a Mobile device.
For more information about Mobile Preferences, see “Changing a User’s Login
Information” on page 6-13.
Mobile
Inspections - Utilizes FireRMS Mobile and the features of the Tablet PC and
Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition to enable pen-tablet functionality such as
handwriting recognition for text field entry and free form signature capture. An inspection
form enables routine occupancy inspections to be performed in the field on a mobile client
(Tablet PC or laptop), thus eliminating redundant entry of data and streamlining the
inspection process.
For more information about Mobile Inspections using a Tablet PC, see Chapter 9 in the
FireRMS User’s Guide.
1-2
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Mobile
Disclosures - Includes, Administrative features to create multiple disclosures and
signatures from which users can choose. A list of patient Disclosures is available from the
Advanced EMS tab when using a Tablet PC.
For more information about Mobile Disclosures, see “Creating Advanced EMS
Disclosures” on page 4-47.
For more information about the FireRMS Mobile product, see Chapter 7: “Using FireRMS
Mobile.”
Note: If you are using the Collector Tool, you can select the Synchronize with Collector
command on the Tools menu to synchronize the data in your FireRMS database with the
Collector database. The Collector Tool is an add-on component, that you can use to collect,
analyze, and export incident data.
Incidents, Training, Other Entries, Daybook and
Documents
You can view or modify FireRMS data using the tabs displayed on the main FireRMS desktop.
These tabs include:
INCIDENTS - Displays the list of Incident records (for example, a fire, auto accident,
earthquake, or an explosion). If you are using the Standard Edition of FireRMS, you can
enter basic EMS patient care data on the following tabs:
Scene - Enter details about the scene of an incident where EMS services were provided.
Patient - Create a record for each patient who received EMS services at an incident.
History - Create a profile for each EMS patient at an incident.
If you are running the Enterprise edition of FireRMS, Advanced EMS is included.
For information about the fields on the additional tabs supplied with Advanced EMS,
see the FireRMS online Help file.
TRAINING - Displays the training records and classes.You can record training classes, and
associate credentials and certifications for personnel.You can also link performance
standards to objectives and skills and associate them with class session definitions. Other
features include tracking required and accredited class sessions, retiring class definitions for
historical reporting, and creating class rosters, registration forms and certificates.
1-3
You can define course, certification, team and credential requirements for obtaining and/or
maintaining personnel credentials. You can define initial and renewal criteria and associate
it with training sessions, prerequisite actions, and actions taken.
OTHER ENTRIES - Displays the current other entry events in FireRMS. Other entries
include tasks assigned to personnel such as equipment maintenance, inspections, and
hydrant testing. You can schedule, modify and delete events.
DAYBOOK - Displays assigned and completed tasks for the current user. Also, allows the
user to create work orders and inventory requests, and to communicate with other FireRMS
users via email.
DOCUMENTS - Displays a tab on the FRMS Desktop and allows administrators to add
department or company documents as attachments or URL links. You can create categories
and sub-categories to help sort and identify documents and URLs that are posted in this
module. Two default categories are provided for the initial setup. Users can select the
desired category or subcategory to add, view, update or remove associated documents in
each group.
For information on security rights for the Documents tab, see Appendix A: “Tables of Field
Values.”
Additional FireRMS Modules
In addition to selecting the desktop tabs, you can click a button to display the following associated
modules on the main window:
Daily Roster - Displays a 24-hour view of daily assignments based on your shift schedule
and department structure. The Daily Roster organizes your department's structure into a tree
view that shows detailed assignments for your agency. It lists apparatus that is inadequately
staffed based on information entered when the apparatus was added to the department. You
can add new assignments, modify existing assignments and preview future rosters for
planning purposes. The assignment information in the Daily Roster is included in other
FireRMS modules, including Incidents, Training, and Daybook. For this reason, you should
keep the information in the roster up-to-date and accurate.
Note: Once you create a Daily Roster in FireRMS, you cannot delete it from the
application. If you experience problems with your Roster, you can delete it from within
SQL Utililities.
Also note the following: When setting up a new database, a roster cannot be generated
unless there are personnel created that match more than one letter as defined in the Shift
Pattern, if the shift pattern contains multiple letters.
When a FireRMS database is first created, it creates a 'default shift pattern' for 24 hours
with a shift sequence of ABC. When this pattern is set up, at least two personnel must be
1-4
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
added, with one assigned to A, and one assigned to B in order to create a new roster for that
day.
To allow the roster to be created when all personnel are assigned to a single shift, such as
"A", the admin should modify the shift pattern (under customize\department) to only list
"A".
Personnel - Contains the list of employee records. Each record contains an employee’s
login and password, the department to which you assigned them, and the security group to
which you granted them access.You can enter personnel data including contact information,
employment data, and duty assignments. You can maintain activity records including partial
shift period assignment tracking and interaction with Advanced Personnel Scheduling.
Additionally, you can record advanced assignment scheduling, pre-arranged shift
exchanges and position changes, commendations, reprimands, evaluations, employment
events, medical events. You can also attach photographs, and track occupational injury and
exposure.
Occupancies - Displays occupancies in your service area. The occupancies can be
commercial, such as office buildings and stores, or residential, such as condominiums and
homes. You can track basic, building, prevention, hazardous materials, pre-plan, fire
prevention systems, and supplemental information for occupancies. You can print Quick
Assessment Plans, record detailed activities, list findings and follow-up information, and
attach hydrants and fire flow, photographs, drawings, or videos. You can create a new
occupancy from an existing one and save the existing occupancy to a history record.
Hydrants - Contains records for all Hydrants in your service area that include hydrant
profiles, in/out-of-service tracking, activity records, hydrant flow calculations, and linkage
to occupancy complexes.
Vehicles & Equipment - Contains records for all department vehicles and equipment, and
those of outside agencies appearing in incident reports. Provides vehicle and equipment
profiles and activity records.You can attach photographs, specification documents, warranty
documents, check sheets, and assignment information.
Scheduling & Tracking - Contains scheduled activities and training activities. Scheduling
& Tracking derives information from various FireRMS modules and organizes it all into a
single tree view. You can view, add, and complete activities. You can also generate activities
from recurring scheduled items.
Note: You can set up the system to periodically create activities from scheduled items
using Schedule Process in SQL Utilities.
Reports - Provides over 160 Crystal reports used to report operational data across modules.
(Crystal Runtime is provided with FireRMS.) Each report is fully exportable in a number of
1-5
file and program formats, allowing users to compile, and combine data into active
information.
Additional Enterprise Tools
The following additional tools are available in FireRMS Enterprise Edition:
Import/Export Tools - Import or export incident-related data compliant with the NFIRS
5.0 standards. Advanced EMS Export modules are available as an add-on for state and
region-specific EMS export requirements.
Flow Calculator Tools - Provide Hydrant and building fire flow calculators used to
determine fire flow availability and requirements.
Cameo Link Tools - Provide linkage to the Cameo Hazardous Materials information
database.
Query Builder - Allows you to create queries for incident or occupancy data and export the
data.
Meaning of Color In Fields
The FireRMS fields displayed in color indicate required or optional information. The following
fill-in fields are displayed:
NFIRS
Required - These fields indicate required information that is dependant on NFIRS
5.0 rules and are displayed in red. You must complete these fields before you can authorize
the incident. The incident must be authorized before it can be exported or included in
reports.
Mandatory - These fields also indicate required information. They are specified by the
administrator and the color they are displayed in is also chosen by the administrator. You
must complete these fields before you can authorize the incident. The incident must be
authorized before it can be exported using NFIRS Export, or included in reports.
Recommended - These fields indicate recommended information. They are specified by
the administrator and the color they are displayed in is chosen by the administrator.
Administrators recommend this information be filled in. You can authorize the incident
without completing recommended fields.
Optional - The remaining fields are optional. They are displayed in white.
Changing the Desktop Font Size
You can change the size of the font on your desktop. You can increase the font size to easily view
the fields where you position the mouse. In addition to the default font, you can choose from one of
three larger fonts.
To change the font size:
1-6
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. In the Tools menu, click User Preferences followed by Expand Controls.
2. Select Big to display 12-point characters, Bigger to display 14-point characters, or Biggest
to display 20-point characters. The selection None displays the default font size. When you
hover a mouse over a field, the field and the text you enter is enlarged.
Setup Overview
After installing FireRMS, you must perform some initial setup before you can report incidents and
perform other fire department management tasks.
The first task is to enter department information; set up the “codes” (menu selections) used for
selection lists, explorers and finders in FireRMS, and add apparatus, personnel, and the cities and
streets in the service area.
Because some FireRMS features depend on some of the data being entered first, you must follow a
specific sequence when entering the data. You can perform the initial setup using the Welcome
Wizard screen that appears when you first open FireRMS. The wizard guides you through the setup
process. When you have completed these tasks, you can then create security groups and define
access rights for your employees.
If you choose not to use the Welcome Wizard, you can perform the same tasks, with the exception
of Adding Your Personnel, by selecting the Tools menu and then selecting the Customize command
on the FireRMS desktop. The first three commands on the Tools menu correspond to the first three
steps in the Welcome Wizard and are displayed in sequence.
For information about adding your personnel without the Welcome Wizard, click the
Personnel button on the desktop and then see “Adding Personnel” on page 3-21.
Using either the Welcome Wizard or the menu, the initial setup steps are as follows:
Step 1: Enter Your Department Information
Your department information includes basic information, fire department structure, and
shift patterns. Basic information includes agency name and address, FDID number, and
demographics. Your department structure is defined using Divisions, Battalions, and
Stations. You define the shift patterns your employees will use. Shift patterns include
start and end times and a start date.
For more information, see “Entering Department Information” on page 3-1.
Step 2: Customize Your Codes
Code customization includes setting up Department codes, 901 codes, and EMS codes
that are used for FireRMS selection lists (drop-down menus, finders, and explorers).
Note: The Chemicals tab contains a read-only list of chemical codes. These codes are
displayed in the chemical look-up tables which users can search through.
Setup Overview
1-7
 For more information, see “Customizing Codes” on page 3-10.
Step 3: Add and Staff Your Apparatus
Your list of apparatus should include all of your department's units as well as any units
from other agencies that may provide mutual aid to your department. These units are
used for incident reporting, personnel assignments, and the Vehicles & Equipment
module. You can select staff for each apparatus you add. Some of the apparatus types
you can choose from, are engines, trucks, boats and aircraft.
For more information, see “Adding Apparatus and Staffing Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Step 4: Add Your Personnel
Personnel information includes name and address, assignment information, login
information, and shifts. Additional information includes emergency contact
information, medical information, attachments (.BMP files), exception information for
shift patterns, test data, and military information.
For more information, see “Adding Personnel” on page 3-21.
Step 5: Define Your Cities and Streets
The final step of the FireRMS setup process, using the Welcome Wizard, is to create a
list of cities and streets in your service area. Once you have added cities, you can add
streets.
For more information, see “Entering Cities” on page 3-25.
For more information, see “Entering Streets” on page 3-28.
Once you have completed these tasks using the Welcome Wizard, the final required task is:
Step 6: Create Security Groups and Define Access Rights
You must create security groups and then choose a level of access for each group. You
can assign your personnel to one of these security groups in the Personnel module.
For more information, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining Access Rights”
on page 3-31.
Setting Up Additional Modules
After completing the initial setup tasks, in order to collect accurate information regarding incidents,
you must enter information in some additional modules, for example, Hydrants and Incidents.
Other modules, such as Training, are optional; you only need to enter the information if you will be
using the module. To enter information in these modules use the remaining Customize commands
on the Tools menu.
Step 7: Customize Hydrants
Customization tasks specific to the Hydrants module include creating a list of hydrant
related actions and assignments and defining a hydrant numbering scheme.
For more information, see “Creating Hydrant Actions” on page 4-2.
Step 8: Customize Occupancies
1-8
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Customization tasks specific to the Occupancies module include creating a list of
occupancy-related actions and assignments, setting up an occupancy-numbering
scheme, and defining building codes for use in occupancy descriptions.
For more information, see “Customizing Occupancies” on page 4-6.
Step 9: Customize Incidents
Customization tasks specific to the Incidents module include setting defaults, selecting
aid given codes, and setting billing rates.
For more information, see “Customizing Incidents” on page 4-20.
Step 10: Customize Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations
Customization tasks specific to the Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations module include
creating lists of vehicle and equipment related actions, creating a list of equipment
categories, and creating an assignment list for vehicles, equipment, and locations.
For more information, see “Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Step 11: Customize Training
Customization tasks specific to the Training module include creating your classes,
objectives and skills, credentials and training standards, and defining the default results
for classes and objectives/skills.
For more information, see “Customizing Training” on page 4-31.
Step 12: Customize Other Entries
The customization task for the Other Entries module is to define the default results for
other entry events.
For more information, see “Customizing Default Results for Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Customizing Module Selections
After you have entered data in all the required FireRMS modules, you, or your personnel can begin
entering incident information. If before using this product, you want to change field selections
available to your users, you can customize your application in the following ways:
You
can customize Department Codes, EMS Codes, and 901 Codes for the fields,
drop-down boxes, and list boxes of the tabs displayed on the Customize menu commands,
desktop tabs, and desktop buttons.
You can select the fields on the Incidents tab you wanted displayed as “mandatory” and as
“recommended.” When you enable these fields, you can also indicate the color in which
you want these fields to display.
The selections that appear in the fields, drop-down boxes, and list boxes of the various tabs are
based on the category assigned to that field. You can modify the selections by adding items to, or
removing items from the category.
Customizing Module Selections
1-9
For information about customizing the selections for the Customize menu commands, see
“Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands” on page C-2.
For information about customizing the selections for the desktop tabs, see “Customizing
Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms” on page C-22.
For information about customizing the selections for the desktop buttons, see “Customizing
Fields for Daily Roster, Personnel, Occupancies, Hydrants, and Vehicles and Equipment” on
page C-103.
Determining The Data Your Personnel Can View
You can control the data that is displayed for each user through settings you assign to their
personnel record. You can:
Filter
Data - FireRMS Filtering is the means by which personnel can retrieve and display
specific FireRMS desktop data that is only relevant to their needs. The Administrator
determines the data displayed to their personnel.
Restrict Access to Data - You can restrict access to data via security objects that
correspond to menus, forms and the desktop.
Customize Data - You can customize the data displayed by hiding fields in any module,
hiding tabs, or creating new, custom, tabs for Incidents, Advanced EMS, and Occupancies.
Filtering Data
The department level you assign to your personnel determines the amount of data they can view.
Additionally, users can further reduce the data displayed on their individual desktops using the
desktop settings Set To Current User and Not Assigned.
Filtering Data By Department Level
FireRMS Filtering has been implemented using a “Logical Hierarchy.” This Logical Hierarchy is
based on the traditional structure of a fire department. The traditional structure contains Divisions,
Battalions, and Stations. Each Department, Division, Battalion and Station level, has characteristics
in terms of roles, data access, and security restrictions. Figure 1-2 depicts the Logical Hierarchy.
1-10
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Figure 1-2: Logical Hierarchy of a Fire Department
An administrator assigns one of the department levels below to a user. The user can view only the
data available to their department level.
Department - Personnel assigned to Dept. can filter data for all Divisions, Battalions, and
Stations in the department.
Division - Personnel assigned to Division can filter incidents in their command or division.
This includes the Battalions and Stations that their Division supports.
Battalion - Personnel assigned to Battalion can filter incidents contained in a specific
Battalion and the assigned stations that this specific Battalion supports.
Station - Personnel assigned to Station can filter only the data at their local station level.
Administrators can select the following settings to restrict these areas of the product to the user’s
assigned department level; Protect Roster, Protect Daybook, Protect Personnel, and Protect
Desktop.
For information on setting a department level for personnel, see “Adding Personnel” on page
3-21.
For information about Protect Daybook and Protect Desktop, see “Enabling Login Security/
Protecting Daybook and Desktop” on page 5-2.
Determining The Data Your Personnel Can View
1-11
For information about Protect Roster and Protect Personnel, see “Protecting the Daily Roster
and Personnel Module” on page 5-6.
Filtering Data Using Desktop Settings
Users can limit the data displayed on their specific desktop by selecting the desktop filtering
settings, Set To Current User, and Not Assigned. These filtering settings are specific to each user’s
desktop, and include Incidents, Training, Other Entries, and Daybook respectively. (If neither check
box is selected, the information displayed is filtered to the current user’s assignment level.)
Set To Current User - When a user logs on and checks the Set To Current User box, only
data, e.g. Incident records, with resources the user is assigned to, are displayed. If this box is
not checked, all data relevant to the user’s department level is displayed.
Not Assigned - When a user checks the Not Assigned box, all Incidents, Training Classes,
or Other Entries that have not been assigned a resource are displayed. Resources are a
combination of apparatus and personnel assigned to an incident or task.
Set to Roster – When a user logs on and checks the Set To Roster box, only data for which
the user is responsible based on his current Roster Assignment will display. Daily Roster
assignments may vary from the default schedule or location assignment setup in Personnel.
If you participated on an incident that is outside your Roster assignment, use the Set to
Current User filter to see those records.
An additional desktop filtering mechanism, the Desktop Filter, can be used to filter data for the
Incidents and Training tabs on the desktop.
Desktop Filter - Users can filter incident data by apparatus, incident type, location,
completed and not reviewed, incomplete, reviewed, shift, and reporting station within their
assigned structure level. The selections you can choose from are determined by the
department structure set up by the Administrator.
Refer to the “Filter the Incident List” topic in the online help for information about
filtering incidents via specific criteria.
Setting Responsibility Levels for the Personnel and Roster
Modules
Fire RMS 4.4 or later enables you to specify responsibility levels for an individual in the Personnel
and Roster modules. You can use this feature to allow a logged in user to view the Incidents and the
Daybook/To do list based on the filter set in the Responsible Level field in the Personnel and Roster
modules.
To use this feature:
1-12
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. As a pre-requisite, ensure that the Protect Daybook and Protect Desktop fields are
checked for the system. Use Tools>Administration>System> Settings to access these
fields in the More Settings area of the screen. Restart FireRMS.
2. When these settings are enabled, FireRMS checks the Responsible Level field in the Roster
module to check which records or related records are displayed to a specific user. You can
view or modify the setting in the Roster module on the Roster Entry tab for the specific
user.
If there is no roster for the day, or if the logged on user is not on the current day’s roster,
FireRMS checks the Personnel module for the setting of this field. You can view or modify
the setting in the Personnel module by clicking on the Basic Info tab for a specific user.
3. The Responsible Level field setting in these modules allow the logged in user to view all
records in the Incident and the Daybook/To do List for the level set in the field, regardless
of the person’s actual roster or personnel assignment. So a user could be assigned to a
specific station for a day, but still be able to view records created for a different level
station, division, battalion or department. This allows for greater flexibility in viewing
information for personnel who may work in other departments, battalions and so on.
Note that the Responsible Level field is set to the current assignment by default in either the
Personnel or Roster modules. You may modify the default setting to allow the user to view
information based on a higher or lower level filter if desired.
Restricting Access to Data
In addition to using Filtering to determine the information your personnel can view, you can assign
access levels to menu commands, tabs, and the FireRMS desktop. Each security group you create
contains a list of “security objects” that correspond to the FireRMS menus, forms, and the desktop.
Each user’s ability to access an item is determined by the level of access chosen in the security
group to which you assigned them.
For information on assigning levels of access to security objects, see “Creating Security
Groups and Defining Access Rights” on page 3-31.
For a list of the security objects to which you can restrict access, see “Access Rights
Definitions” on page A-1.
Customizing Data
You can customize the data displayed on your users desktops by hiding fields in any of the
FireRMS modules that you do not want displayed. You can set default values for data elements.
Also, you can hide Incident and Advanced EMS tabs that you do not use, or you can create new
tabs with specific information that your department needs to collect.
Determining The Data Your Personnel Can View
1-13
For information about hiding FireRMS fields, see “Selecting Mandatory and Recommended
Fields, Repositioning Fields, or Changing Visibility” on page 4-59.
For information about setting default values for the data elements, see “Assigning Default
Values to Data Elements” on page 4-62.
For information about hiding Incident or Advanced EMS tabs, see “Customizing Tabs: Labels,
Sort Order, Visibility” on page 4-51.
For information about creating custom tabs, see “Creating Custom Tabs” on page 4-52.
Note: You can customize the data while in Design Mode or via security objects to which
you have full access. If users are logged into FireRMS when you make changes to the
interface, they must log out of FireRMS and log back in to view these changes.
For information about Design Mode, see “Selecting Mandatory and Recommended Fields,
Repositioning Fields, or Changing Visibility” on page 4-59.
For information about security objects, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining Access
Rights” on page 3-31.
1-14
Chapter 1: FireRMS Overview
2
2
Chapter 2:
Installing FireRMS
This chapter describes how to install the FireRMS application and the FireRMS Mobile software.
Using the FireRMS Mobile software, users can collect data while away from the fire station using a
laptop or a PC tablet and merge it into the database when they return. You can follow the steps in
the next section if you are performing a new application install or an upgrade to a previous install.
The FireRMS application CD contains the selections in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
The FireRMS Mobile CD contains one selection: Install FireRMS Mobile.
Table 2-1: FireRMS Install Main Menu
Selection
Description
Install Products
Lists all the software you can install.
Browse Contents
Displays a folder with all the information provided on this CD.
Documentation
Displays a folder with all relevant documentation, e.g., FireRMS
Administrator Guide and FireRMS 4.x Release Notes.
Contact Us
Displays a phone number, email address, and web address for
ZOLL.
When you select Install Products, you can install the software described in Table 2-2.
Refer to the FireRMS Release Notes for the correct hardware/software requirements.
Table 2-2: FireRMS Install Products Menu
Software
Description
FireRMS 4.x Client
Select this if you want to install the client software.
Crystal Reports 11
Interface
Select this after you install the client software to install Crystal
Reports Runtime files.
SQL Utilities
Select this to install SQL Utilities on the Administrator’s PC.
2-1
Table 2-2: FireRMS Install Products Menu
Software
Description
3rd Party Utilities
Select this to install 3rd party utilities, e.g. MSDE or MDAC 2.8.
Add-On Apps
Select this to install add-on applications, such as Audit Log
Viewer that you use with the SQL Utility Audit Management or
Central Web Reporting.
Installing FireRMS
These installation procedures describe how to install software on the FireRMS client and the server.
Before upgrading your software, you must be aware of the following:
If
you install FireRMS in a directory other than c:\Firerms5sql, and you use SMS, you
must open the SMS configuration and register the FireRMS executable in its new location.
Installing FireRMS Client Software
This section describes the procedure you follow to install software on the client. In addition to the
client software, FireRMS requires certain third party utilities for normal operations. All utilities
except for SP3 can be found on the FireRMS CD.
To install the client software:
1. Insert the FireRMS installation CD in the client CD drive. After a pause, the CD options
screen appears. (If the CD options screen does not start automatically, in Windows Explorer
open the FireRMS installation CD directory and double-click Launch.exe.)
2. Click Install Products in the list of options.
3. Click FireRMS Client.
4. A Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next. A Customer Information screen is displayed
with User Name and Company Name fields.
ZOLL recommends that you use the default of Install app for those who use this computer.
This allows any FireRMS user to run the application on the client.
5. Enter this information and click Next.
6. The Destination Location screen displays. Use the default directory, c:\firerms5sql, and
click Next, or click Browse to install to a different directory.
2-2
Chapter 2: Installing FireRMS
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
7. A Setup Type screen displays and you can choose a Complete or a Custom install and
click Next. (If you select a Custom install, you can deselect FireRMS Core application or
Crystal Reports 11 Runtime.)
8. A File Copy screen displays with Setup information. Click Next.
9. A Setup Status screen displays and the software is installed.
10. When you see the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen, click Finish. The main screen
displays.
11. OPTIONAL: Click 3rd Party Utilities or Add on Apps if you need to install any of the
third party utilities or the add on applications on your system.
Note: If you will be using the central web reporting option, make sure you install the
Add on App Central Web Reporting.
12. Click Exit twice to close the FireRMS install program.
13. Restart your computer.
Installing FireRMS Server Software
To install software on the server:
1. Insert the FireRMS installation CD in the client CD drive. After a pause, the CD options
screen appears. (If the CD options screen does not start automatically, in Windows Explorer
open the FireRMS installation CD directory and double-click Launch.exe.)
2. In the list of options, click SQL Utilities.
3. A Welcome screen is displayed. Click Next.
4. A Customer Information screen is displayed with User Name and Company Name fields.
5. Enter this information and click Next.
6. The Destination Location screen displays. Use the default directory, c:\firerms5sql, and
click Next, or click Browse to install to a different directory.
7. A Setup Status screen displays and the software is installed.
Installing FireRMS
2-3
8. After completing the install, click Finish. We recommend you install the add-on application
Log Viewer, in SQL Utilities, if you will be using Audit Management or Fire Reports
Central is you will be using Central Web Reporting.
9. Click Finish when you are done installing Log Viewer and click Exit twice to close the
FireRMS install program.
10. Double-click the SQL Utilities icon on the desktop. If the SQL Service is not currently
running on the local machine, you will be prompted to enter the server name and login. If
the service is running locally, SQL Utilities automatically detects this information.
11. Do one of the following:
Update
the FireRMS database(s) if you are upgrading your software.
a) Verify that no clients are connected to the database(s).
b) In the Your Databases list of the SQL Utilities for FireRMS dialog, locate and
highlight the FireRMS database that you are updating.
c) Click the Lock Database check box.
d) Click the Update button to update a single database or the Update All button to
update all the databases.
e) On the Maintenance tab, click Reset Stored Procedures.
f) Uncheck the Lock Database check box to unlock the FireRMS databases.
Create
a new database if you are performing a new install.
a) Click the Create button. The Create Database dialog box displays.
b) Enter the database name in the Database Name text box.
c) Click OK.
Note: If you are updating multiple databases, be sure to check the version number next to
each database when the update is complete to verify that all databases were updated.
12. Close the SQL Utilities application.
13. Start FireRMS on a client machine.
14. Click the Help menu, then click Help About.
15. In the About dialog, click the Details button.
16. In the Details dialog, verify the application version number is correct.
2-4
Chapter 2: Installing FireRMS
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Note: If you will be using the Central Web Reporting feature described in Chapter 5, you
must install the Central Web Reporting software on your Web server. The software resides
in the Add-On Apps section of the Install CD. Also, in addition to the open database
connection created on each client, the Administrator must create an open database
connection (ODBC) to RMS5SQL_DSN on the Web server.
Security for Crystal Reports
FireRMS 4.3 or later provides additional security for Crystal Reports. A new tab is available in:
Tools> Administration>Security > Report Access. By using these new security options, you can
choose to restrict access to reports for each security group. Restrictions can include preventing
access from viewing reports, printing reports and/or exporting report data. This new security option
also applies to locally created reports that follow the FireRMS naming convention and which are
located in the Reports folder. This new option does not affect reports printed from other modules in
the product, such as the ability to print an incident from within the Incident form. Security access
for all reports is enabled for all security groups by default during the upgrade. The following
screenshot shows an example:
Installing FireRMS
2-5
2-6
Chapter 2: Installing FireRMS
3
3
Chapter 3:
Performing Initial Set Up
Procedures
You must perform initial set up procedures before you can use this product. The initial set up
procedures consist of two major tasks:
Performing initial customization
Creating security groups and defining access rights
You can use the Welcome Wizard to guide you through the initial customization of FireRMS. The
Wizard displays on your screen. You can select a check box for the task you want to perform. After
you complete each task, the Wizard redisplays on your screen.
If you would prefer not to use the Welcome Wizard, you can complete these procedures using menu
commands described in the following sections.
Entering Department Information
You must enter basic fire department information, indicate the department structure, and create the
shift patterns for your department personnel.
Entering Basic Department Information
The basic information that you enter is used to identify the incident reports associated with your
department in the NFIRS incident database.
To enter basic fire department information:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Department.
3-1
2. On the Basic Info tab, enter the information in the fields provided.
Table 3-1 contains descriptions of the fields on this tab. Remember that you must enter
information in any field displaying mandatory information.
Table 3-1: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions
3-2
Field
Description
Department Name & IDs
Your fire department name. NFIRS requires this information on all
incident reports, and is automatically included in your incident
exports.
FDID
The fire department identifier (FDID) assigned to your department
by the State Program Manager. You can enter a maximum of five
alphanumeric characters. The FDID number is required by NFIRS
for all incidents. Like the Department Name, FDID is
automatically included in your incident exports.
EMS
Your department's EMS identifier. This is a secondary number
used to identify your EMS agency for EMS exports from
FireRMS. It is used by some states for collection information. It is
not required by NFIRS.
County
Your department's County ID, if used. This number is used by
some states for collection information. It is not required by
NFIRS.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-1: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Dispatch
Your department's Dispatch ID, if used. This number is used by
some states for collection information. It is not required by
NFIRS.
Address, Phone, Fax,
E-mail, and WEB page
The primary address of your department and a person to contact,
in addition to their phone, fax, E-mail and Web page, if applicable.
City, State, Zip Code
Enter the city, state and zip code where your primary department
is located. The first time you enter a city, FireRMS prompts you to
add it to your list of cities. Click Yes. The list of cities is a global
look-up table (selection list) used by data entry personnel to select
cities when entering information in FireRMS. It helps to speed
data entry and ensure accuracy.
Career
The number of professional paid staff members in your
department. You can enter a number or click the arrows to select
the number you want.
Volunteer, paid or
Volunteer, unpaid
The number of paid volunteers and the number of unpaid
volunteers in your department.
Stations
The number of stations in your department.
Budget
The department's total annual budget in dollars.
EMS
A selection that describes the level of EMS provided by your
department.
Square Miles
The total area in square miles of your service area.
Population
The number of people living in your service area.
Density
A selection that best describes the population density in your
service area.
ePCR Company Name
Enter your ePCR Company Name if you are exporting records to
an ePCR database that holds multiple agencies.
Auto-Complete ePCR
If you are receiving updates from an ePCR database, use this
check box to automatically mark incidents as complete when they
are created by the eCPR user. Leaving this check box unchecked
will cause those incidents to display on the reconcile tab where
they must be manually updated and completed.
3-3
Table 3-1: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Authorized Personnel for
ePCR
If you are receiving updates from an ePCR database, select a name
here for the Member Making Report in the incidents.
Note: If you have mapped your ePCR User IDs, you do not need
to enter a value here.
ePCR Export Start Date
If you are exporting records to an ePCR database, enter the date
for the earliest incident you wish to post to ePCR. The date is
based on the Incident Alarm Date.
Follow the procedure in the next section to set up the department structure.
Setting Up The Department Structure
The department structure indicates the organizational structure of your department. The department
structure can have up to three levels in FireRMS. The structure is used in FireRMS when you
generate rosters, or assign units, equipment, and personnel. Refer to Appendix B for some sample
department organizational structures.
To set up your department structure:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Department. The Customize
Department dialog displays.
C
D
d l
hS
T b
2. On the Structure tab, enter the information in the fields provided.
3-4
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
3. Click the Use Divisions check box or the Use Battalions check box at the top of the tab.
Use Divisions enables you to create a three-level structure with Divisions, Battalions, and
Stations. Use Battalions enables you to create a two-level structure with Battalions and
Stations. Table 3-2 contains descriptions of the fields on this tab.
Note: Once you create a department structure, you cannot change it.
4. Create Divisions, Battalions, and Stations or just Battalions and Stations using the following
procedures:
Create
Divisions:
a) Click the Divisions radio button.
b) Click the New button.
c) Type up to four unique alphanumeric characters in the Code text box to identify the
division.
d) Type a description of the Division in the Description text box.
e) Repeat this procedure to enter another Division or proceed with Create Battalions.
Create
Battalions:
Click the Battalions radio button.
Click the New button.
Type a unique code and enter a description to identify the Battalion.
In the Assigned To drop-down, select the Division to which you want to assign the
Battalion.
e) Repeat this procedure to enter another Battalion or proceed with Create Stations.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Create
Stations:
Click the Stations radio button.
Click the New button.
Type a unique code and enter a description to identify the Station.
In the Assigned To drop-down, select the Battalion to which you want to assign the
Station.
e) Repeat this procedure to enter another Station or proceed to the next section to enter
the department shift patterns.
a)
b)
c)
d)
3-5
Note: NFIRS does not support more than 3 characters for a Station ID, but FireRMS
allows you to create Stations with up to 4 characters for the Station ID. This value is
truncated to the first 3 characters only when the station is included on an Incident Report
which is being exported for NFIRS reporting.
Table 3-2: Structure Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Use Divisions
Creates a three-level departmental hierarchy: Divisions,
Battalions, and Stations. You can have multiple Divisions and
multiple Battalions in each Division. You can then have multiple
Stations in each Battalion.
Use Battalions
Creates a two-level departmental hierarchy. You can have multiple
Battalions and multiple Stations in each Battalion. If you select
this structure, you will be unable to create Divisions.
Divisions, Battalions, or
Stations
Displays fill-in fields after you select a radio button and click the
New button. After creating Divisions, Battalions, or Stations, you
can modify the information or delete it.
Code
Identifies the Division, Battalion, or Station. You must enter a
unique code for each Division, Battalion, or Station you create.
Description
A brief description containing up to forty alphanumeric characters
of the Division, Battalion, or Station.
Entering Department Shift Patterns
The department shift patterns indicate department work hours. Department shift patterns are used to
make personnel assignments and generate rosters. You can create up to 99 shift patterns, including
the default shift pattern of 24-hours.
To create the department shift patterns:
3-6
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Department. The Customize
Department dialog displays.
2. On the Shifts tab, enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-3 contains
descriptions of the fields on this tab.
3. Click the first available shift pattern in the Shift Patterns list box. If you are defining your
department’s 24-hours shift, click the first shift in the list because the 24-hour shift must
always be the first in the list.
4. In the Description text box, type a name for the shift.
5. In the Start Date text box, type the date on which the shift will become active. If this is a
24-hours shift, select the 24-hour shift check box, otherwise enter the shift start and end
times.
6. Select the pay code to be associated with each shift.
7. In the Shift Pattern text box, type the letter combination that represents the shift cycle,
using the Valid Shift Letters displayed in the list box on the right side of the Shifts tab.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 (choosing the next available shift) to create additional shifts or
click the Close Toolbar button to save your settings.
3-7
For information on adding shift letters or assigning colors to Shift letters, see “Adding Shift
Letters or Assigning Colors To Shifts” on page 3-9.
Table 3-3: Shift Tab Field Descriptions
3-8
Field
Description
Shift Start Time
The start time for the primary 24-hour shift. The primary shift is
tracked as a single 24-hour unit from the shift start term, even if it
crosses into the next day. For example, if your 24-hour shift starts
at 7 A.M. one day, it ends at 7 A.M. the next.
Shift Patterns
Use this option to create your agency's shift patterns in FireRMS.
With the Enterprise edition of FireRMS, You can define up to 99
shift patterns in addition to the default Monday-Friday shift
pattern. (With the Standard Edition, you can define three shift
patterns.) The shift rotation is based on the Shift Start Time, that
is, all shifts will begin after the Shift Start Time. Shift1 should
always be used for your primary 24-hour shift.
Description
A description of the shift pattern that suits your department's
needs; for example “24-hour shift” or “4-10 Fri. Off.”
Shift Pattern
The shift pattern is indicated using the Shift Letters. Type one
complete shift cycle (until the pattern starts repeating itself). The
dialog on the previous page contains a shift pattern that starts with
shift A and ends with shift B in a repeating pattern.
Start Date
The first day in the shift cycle. This is important as it ensures that
shifts are assigned to the correct days.
24 Hour Shift
Indicates the shift is 24 hours. You can have multiple 24-hour
shifts, but Shift 1 is always the primary 24-hour shift (first on the
list) on which all other 24-hour shift cycle start times are based.
Start and End
For shifts other than the primary 24-hour shift (Shift 1), enter the
shift start time and end time using military (24-hour clock) time.
This is used by the Daily Roster to ensure people are still assigned
to the correct shift into the next day. (This is assuming the shift
starts one morning and ends the next.)
Valid Shift Letters and
Assigned Colors
Shift letters and assigned colors are used to visually represent
shifts and to track shift patterns on the calendar. Each letter/color
combination represents a single shift. Letters and colors are not
exclusive to one shift pattern; they can be re-used in different
combinations to represent multiple shifts.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-3: Shift Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Paycodes
Each shift may be assigned to its own paycode to reflect the
varying daytime, nighttime and weekend shifts. Paycodes are set
up under Department codes and each code may be used to
represent On Duty & Available, On Duty but not Available, or Off
Duty.
Adding Shift Letters or Assigning Colors To Shifts
You use shift letters and assigned colors to visually represent shifts and to track all patterns on the
calendar. Each letter and color combination represents a single shift. Letters and colors are not
exclusive to one shift pattern; you can re-use them in different combinations to represent multiple
shifts.
To add shift letters or assign colors to Shifts:
1. On the Shifts tab of the Customize Department dialog, click the Add Letter button to add
the next available shift letter to the list.
2. Repeat Step 1 for each shift letter you wish to add or proceed to Step 3 to assign shift colors.
3. In the Valid Shift Letters and Assigned Colors list box, select a Shift Letter representing
the shift to which you want to assign color.
4. Click Assign Color to assign a color to the shift you chose.
5. Click the color in the color palette and click the OK button.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to assign additional colors to shift letters.
7. OPTIONAL: Click the Shift Calendar button next to the Add Letter button to view the
Calendar. The Shift Calendar uses the Assigned Colors and Shift Cycle to represent daily
shift rotations.
You can view shift rotation by Day, Month, or Date Range. Select different shift patterns to
view from the drop-down box.
8. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are done.
3-9
Note: When you set up multiple letters for a shift, you must assign at least one person to
each shift letter in the Personnel module before you are able to generate a Roster that
includes that shift.
Customizing Codes
You can define the values or “codes” that appear in the list boxes, drop-down list boxes, explorers,
and finders in FireRMS. You can enter codes to identify your department-related information, add
sub-codes to the 901 codes, and add sub-codes to the EMS codes. You can also view a list of
Chemical codes.
Department Codes are used in incident reports, training, and other areas in FireRMS. The 901
Codes are the NFIRS-based predefined 901codes. The Chemical codes are the values that appear in
the chemical look-up tables. The EMS codes are predefined codes that you will use when reporting
EMS incidents.
Department, 901 and EMS codes can be grouped into categories or sub categories. You can
highlight any code and click on the Assign to Sub-Category list box on the Customize Code form.
You can type in a new category name or select from an existing name previously defined. You can
also assign all codes to a sub category, or just some of the codes. When users later right click on any
field that provides a code explorer option, they can expand the listing of sub categories you have
created to view and select codes from that group.
Entering Department Codes
Department codes are used in incident reports, training, and other areas of FireRMS. The
department codes you create are contained in categories. Some examples of categories are, “Cause
of Firefighter Injury,” “Incident Type,” and “Patient Status.”
To enter your department codes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Codes. The Customize Codes
dialog displays.
3-10
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
2. Select the code category to which you wish to add a new code from the Category
drop-down list.
3. In the Code text box, type an alphanumeric code that represents the department code you
are creating. (If you are adding additional Fire agencies, enter the agency’s FDID number as
the code value.)
4. In the Description text box, type a name for the code. The Code and Description will be
used by data entry personnel to identify the value in selection lists in FireRMS. (Table 3-4
contains descriptions of the fields on this tab.)
5. Enter a state if the State text box is displayed.
6. Click OK. The Category is created.
7. Click the New button.
8. Enter a Code, Translation Code, and Description.
9. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 to enter additional department codes.
10. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Customize Codes dialog.
3-11
Table 3-4: Department Codes Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Category
Select the Category that you want to update.
Code
A unique alphanumeric EMS code of up to four characters.
Description
A description containing up to forty alphanumeric characters of
the code created for the selected category.
Description
A description containing up to forty alphanumeric characters of
the code created for the selected category.
Translation Code
An alphanumeric code used to collect specific departmental
information or for use in exporting code data to third party
programs
Entering 901 Sub-Codes
The 901 codes are primarily used in the Incidents module to store and track incident data in
accordance with the NFIRS incident reporting rules. The 901 Codes tab has over 100 categories
based on the NFIRS 6.0 codes.
The 901 codes are NFIRS-based, so you cannot modify them. However, if the 901 codes are not
specific enough to meet your department's needs, you can use the Code and Plus One text boxes to
extend the NFIRS 901 code set. You can do this by adding more specific sub-codes to the 901
codes.
To enter your 901 Plus One codes:
3-12
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Codes. The Customize Codes
dialog displays.
2. On the 901 Codes tab, enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-5 contains
descriptions of the fields on this tab.
3. Select the 901 Code Category in the drop-down box to which you wish to add a plus one
code.
4. In the list box, click the code to which you wish to add a plus one code.
5. Click the New button. Click Yes when you are prompted to create a copy of the selected 901
code.
6. In the Plus One text box, type the plus one code. This code will be added to the base 901
code to indicate that it is a subset of that code.
Note: You should be aware of the following restrictions:
Code Plus One is not allowed for some 901 codes, such as index codes. The New button is
grayed if you select a 901 code that does not allow Code Plus One.
The 901 codes must meet the minimum code size to add Code Plus One.
Using Code Plus One values may result in warnings from your State System when the
NFIRS export is processed.
7. In the Description text box, type a name for the code.
8. Select the Common Code check box if you want to add this code to the 901 code explorer's
common code category. Common codes are frequently selected by data entry personnel.
3-13
9. OPTIONAL: If you delete a code from the list, you can click the Restore button to re-add
the deleted code.
10. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Customize Codes dialog.
Table 3-5: 901 Codes Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
View by Category or
View Common
Lists the 901 codes by category or lists the codes that have been
designated as common codes.
Code
Displays the designated NFIC code.
Plus One
The sub-code of numbers or letters that are appended to the 901
base code. Using a sub-code enables you to create a more specific
sub-code. For example you may want more specific codes for staff
vehicles.
Description
Describes the 901 code or the sub-code you entered.
Common Code
Indicates the 901 code is a common code. Common codes are
frequently selected by data entry personnel. Common codes are
listed at the top of the Code Explorer to make it easy for personnel
to select.
Code Size
The minimum code size required for a 901 code to be a valid
look-up value within the selected category. This also indicates the
minimum size a code must be before you can add a code plus one.
(Code Size=2 means 901 codes must be two characters long
before you can add a code plus one to it.)
Entering EMS Codes
You can enter EMS codes to extend the existing base EMS codes. This is useful when an EMS code
description is not specific enough for your department's needs.
To enter your EMS codes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Codes.
The Customize Codes dialog displays.
2. In the Customize Codes dialog, click the EMS Codes Tab.
3-14
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Note: Systems setup to use NEMSIS should not modify EMS Codes through the
FireRMS User Interface, but should use Excel to update the Spreadsheets provided for each
NEMSIS reporting system and then re-import the Code set through SQL Utils.
See the FireRMS NEMSIS Administrator’s Guide for more information on using NEMSIS
and NEMSIS EMS Codes.
3. Select the code category to which you wish to add a new code from the Category
drop-down list.
4. In the Code text box, type an alphanumeric code that represents the EMS code you are
creating.
5. In the Description text box, type a name for the code. The Code and Description is used by
data entry personnel to identify the value in selection lists in FireRMS.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 4 to enter additional EMS codes.
7. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Customize Codes dialog.
Note: The Restore option restores all base EMS codes deleted from the category. The Plus
One codes are not restored.
Viewing or Adding Chemical Codes
FireRMS provides you with chemical look-up tables you can check so that you can clearly define
the chemicals involved in an incident as required by NFIRS. The chemical look-up tables include
3-15
drop-down lists and Explorers. The list of chemicals provided with FireRMS was created by NFIC,
but you may add additional codes if desired. The NFIRS Extract will include the code name rather
than the code number, so you may use any numbering scheme appropriate for your local agency.
To view the chemical codes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Codes. The Customize
Chemical Codes dialog displays.
2. In the Chemicals tab, click Search by Name or View Common. Search by Name enables
you to click the Search button and enter a chemical name to search for. Click View
Common to list chemicals designated with common codes. Table 3-6 contains descriptions
of the fields on this tab.
3. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Customize Codes dialog box.
Table 3-6: Chemicals Tab Field Descriptions
3-16
Field
Description
Search by Name or
View Common
Search for a chemical by name or list the chemicals designated
with common codes.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-6: Chemicals Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Name
The standard chemical or trade name by which the hazardous
material is commonly known. Products from different
manufacturers with similar chemical ingredients may have
different trade names. The proper entry for this field is the
chemical or trade name of the hazardous material as shown on the
MSDS, product label, packaging or container.
Name for Ordering and
Locating
An alternate name used when ordering or locating the chemical.
Number
The identification number assigned to the chemical by the
National Fire Information Council (NFIC).
DOT Identifier
The identification number assigned to the chemical by the
Department of Transportation (DOT) Hazard Classification
system.
Cas No
The identification number assigned to the chemical by the
Chemical Abstract Service (CAS).
Common
When checked, designates the selected Chemical code as a
common code. A common code is one that is frequently selected
by data entry staff. Common codes are moved to the top of the
Code Explorer to make it easier for data entry personnel to locate
and select them.
Cache File
Indicates that FireRMS is reading the Chemical codes from a
cache file.
Note that FireRMS 4.4 or later enables you to add chemical names if the code does not exist in the
system-wide list.
FireRMS supports three new security options to control access to the Chemical Code List:
Menu,
Tools, Add Chemicals: When this security option is set to 3 – Full Access, users in
the security group are able to add new codes to the Chemical Code list. Security Option
‘Menu, Tools, Customize Chemicals’ must also be set to 3 in order to access the Chemical
Code List tab.
Menu, Tools, Customize Chemicals: When this security option is set to 3 – Full Access,
users in the security group are able to view the Chemical Code List tab and modify the data
for all existing Chemicals. If the other two new security options (Menu, Tools, Add
Chemicals & Menu, Tools, Delete Chemicals) are set to 1, a user with this security option
3-17
set to 3 will not be able to Add or Delete Chemicals to or from the existing list. This
security option must be set to 3 in order to access the Chemical Code List tab.
Menu, Tools, Delete Chemicals: When this security option is set to 3 – Full Access, users
in the security group with this access level are able to delete codes from the Chemical Code
list. (Security Option ‘Menu, Tools, Customize Chemicals’ must also be set to 3 in order to
access the Chemical Code List tab).
Note: The EMS Code Builder Program is no longer required to set up Advanced EMS
for new databases or to add new EMS Codes. To set a new Database to use the Advanced
EMS Module in Incidents, go to Tools>Administration>System>Settings and click on
the button labeled Use Advanced EMS. This button is only available on Enterprise
Licensed systems when Advanced EMS is not already enabled. All available EMS Code
Categories now display by default in the EMS Codes List (Tools>Customize Codes>EMS
Adding Apparatus and Staffing Apparatus
You must add all units in your department as well as those from other departments that may appear
in incident reports. Apparatus can include mutual aid vehicles, police vehicles, unit radio
identifiers, and private ambulances. The apparatus are added to the Apparatus Finder that data entry
personnel use to select units for incident reports.
You can also define the staffing for each type of apparatus. If the staffing is not adequate, the
non-compliant node in the Daily Roster indicates the apparatus has insufficient staff.
To add your apparatus:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Apparatus.
The Customize Apparatus dialog displays.
3-18
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
2. In the Basic Info tab, click the New button.
3. Enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-7 contains descriptions of the fields on
this tab.
4. In the Unit ID text box, type the unit identifier for dispatch.
5. In the Type drop-down, select the unit type that best describes this unit.
6. In the Assigned To drop-down, select an assignment for the unit. The unit can be assigned
to the Division, Battalion, Station or Department level. Skip this step if this unit is not
assigned to your agency.
7. If this unit does not belong to your department, select the Not Our Unit check box, and
select the agency to which the unit belongs from the Agency drop-down.
8. Click Add to select a department position from the drop-down, and enter a quantity. Enter
the shift start and end times for each position.
9. OPTIONAL: Select a position and click Delete to remove a staffing position.
10. Click the Apply to all types button to apply this staffing position to all apparatus of the
same type. For example, if you select a position for ENG1 and you click this button, this
staffing position will also apply to the remaining engines, e.g. ENG2, ENG3, ENG4.
3-19
11. Click the Close Toolbar button to save your changes and close the dialog.
.
Note: NFIRS does not support more than 5 characters for a unit ID, but FireRMS allows
you to create apparatus records with up to 8 characters for the Unit ID. This value is
truncated to the first 5 characters only when the Apparatus is included on an Incident
Report which is exported for NFIRS reporting.
Table 3-7: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions
3-20
Field
Description
Unit ID
The unit identifier used by CAD or your dispatch center. The ID
can be any alphanumeric character combination of up to six
characters. For those departments using the SMS/CadLink, this
must be the same as the ID that CAD uses to identify the unit.
Type
The option that best describes the type of unit.
Assigned To
An assignment for the unit from the department structure. For
example, to assign the unit to a particular station, select Station
from the first drop-down list, then select the station name from the
second list.
Not Our Unit
Indicates the unit does not belong to your department. This is an
important option for identifying units from mutual aid agencies
that appear in your incident reports. Mutual aid units that are
marked as “Not Our Unit” are excluded from your NFIRS exports
to prevent them from being reported twice for the same
incident--once by your agency and once by the mutual aid agency.
“Not Our Unit” is also useful for identifying other units that arrive
on scene such as police vehicles or private ambulances.
Agency
When Not Our Unit is active, this selection would be the agency to
which the unit belongs.
Position
Lists all the positions that were created on Department Codes tab.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Adding Personnel
You will create a personnel record for each employee. Each employees personnel information,
assignment information, and login information is stored in the personnel record.
To add personnel records:
1. Click the Personnel button on the desktop.
2. Click the New button on the List tab. The Basic Info tab displays.
3. Enter the information in the fields displayed in red. This includes name, assignment
information and schedule information. After entering this information you can enter Login
Information, such as a Login Name, to restrict access to the employees personal
information. You can then enter information in the remaining optional fields. Table 3-8
contains descriptions of the fields on this tab.
4. Proceed to the next section to enter additional personal information such as home phone
number and emergency contact information. You can also restrict access to this information
so that only authorized FireRMS users can access it.
3-21
Table 3-8: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions
3-22
Field
Description
Name and Address
The first and last name of the employee, the middle initial, Suffix,
street address, City, State, and Zip Code.
Login Name
The name the employee uses to login to FireRMS.
Security Group
The security group to which you are assigning the employee. The
employee will have access to the FireRMS information and
features assigned to this group.
Create Password
The password the employee will use to login to FireRMS.
Date Filtering Only
Indicates the Incidents are filtered by the date displayed at the
bottom of the FireRMS window, instead of the logical hierarchy.
Start Date
The employee's date of hire. If this employee will start the job at a
future date, you may type the employee's anticipated start date.
This allows you to schedule the employee in advance.
End Date
The termination date of the employee.
Employee Number
The unique identification number assigned to this employee by
your agency. Employee numbers are used to identify employees
and to track employee activities in FireRMS. The data entry
personnel use employee numbers to quickly find employees in
FireRMS.
NFIRS5
The option that describes the employee's primary duty as defined
by NFIRS version 5 codes.
Position
Indicates the employee's position in the department.
Status
Identifies the person as a career employee or a volunteer.
Schedule
The employee's primary shift pattern.
Shift
The employee's primary shift assignment. Shifts are indicated
using letters.
Assigned To
The department level to which the employee will be assigned;
Dept, Division, Battalion, or Station. If you select Station, you
must also select the station name.
Apparatus
The employee’s unit assignment, if a unit was assigned.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-8: Basic Info Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Secondary Tab
A secondary assignment for an employee. The options on this tab
are the same as those on the Primary Tab.
NEMSIS Fields: If your department is using NEMSIS EMS reporting in FireRMS, you need to
update the NEMSIS fields for all users that respond to EMS calls. For more information, see the
NEMSIS Guide for FireRMS for additional information on these fields.
Note: Your selections for Assigned To and Apparatus affect the Incidents a person can
view. For example, if you assign a person to Batt2, incidents assigned to Batt2 appear on
this person’s Incidents list. If you also assign this person to ENG1, and you add ENG1 as
the incident’s apparatus, this incident also appears on this person’s Incidents list.
For a description of the Incidents your personnel can view, see “Determining The Data
Your Personnel Can View” on page 1-10.
Entering and Restricting Employee Contact Information
You can enter employee contact information such as home phone and emergency contact. FireRMS
also allows you to restrict access to this information. Restricting access limits viewing of this
information to authorized FireRMS users only. It also excludes the phone number from general
employee rosters and other reports intended for distribution to general staff.
To enter employee contact information and restrict access to information:
3-23
1. In the Personnel Information dialog, click the Communication tab. (The information you
enter applies to the name of the employee that was displayed on the Basic Info tab when
you selected the Communication tab.)
2. Enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-9 contains descriptions of the fields on
this tab.
3. Select the Restricted check box next to the emergency contact’s home phone number, to
restrict access to that information.
4. Click the Close Toolbar button to save your changes.
If you want to restrict access to the information you entered, you must restrict access to security
groups for the following Restricted Objects; Form, Personnel Info, All, Restricted and Form,
Personnel Info, You, Restricted.
For information, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining Access Rights” on page 3-31.
Table 3-9: Communication Tab Field Descriptions
3-24
Field
Description
Home Phone
Enter the employee’s home phone number. A check mark in the
Restricted box restricts access to this information.
Emergency Contact
Enter information for the person to contact in case of emergency
(e.g., a spouse).
Mobile Phone
Enter the employee’s mobile phone number.
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-9: Communication Tab Field Descriptions (Continued)
Field
Description
Work Phone
Enter the employee’s work phone number and extension.
Email Address
Enter the employee’s email address.
Pager Number/Address
Enter the employee’s pager number or address.
Additional Numbers
Enter any additional contact numbers for the employee.
Entering Cities
You must add all the cities in your service area. You must do this prior to creating incident reports
or performing any other data entry tasks in FireRMS. These cities are added to the City Finder,
which is available to users anywhere a city can be entered in FireRMS.
To add the cities in your service area:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Cities. The Customize Cities
dialog displays.
2. On the Cities tab, click the New button.
3. In the City text box, type the city name.
3-25
4. In the State drop-down, select the state or province to which the city belongs.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each city you wish to enter.
6. You then have two choices:
If
you want to enter numbers to associate with a city, such as a zip code, click on the
city to which you wish to add a number, click the Numbers tab and perform the next
procedure.
Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close
the Customize Cities dialog.
Entering Numbers for Cities
After you enter cities, you can add a variety of numbers or names, e.g., Agency, that you want to
associate with that city. These numbers/names include zip codes, districts, or census tracts. These
numbers/names are available in the City Finder.
To enter numbers for cities:
1. In the Customize Cities dialog, click the Numbers tab, followed by the New Toolbar
button.
2. Enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-10 contains descriptions of the fields
on this tab.
3-26
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-10: Numbers Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Type
The number or the name you wish to add:
Census Tract -- Used to create a list of census tracts within a city.
This is useful when your agency wants to record census tract as
part of the incident location in incident reports.
County -- Used to enter the county or counties within which city
boundaries lie. This is useful when your agency wants to record
county as part of the location information in incident reports.
Select the county you want from the drop-down list.
District -- Used to create a list of districts within a city. This is
useful when your agency wants to record district number in the
location information in incident reports.
Zip Code -- Used to create a list of possible zip codes for a city.
Entering zip codes helps to ensure that the correct zip code is
selected by data entry personnel.
Agency -- Used to create a list of agencies within a city. Agency
information is used in incident reporting when multiple agencies
share the same FireRMS database, allowing you to identify which
agency responded to the incident. After selecting this option,
select the agency you want from the drop-down list.
Other -- Used to record other miscellaneous numbers for a city.
Other numbers are used for incident reporting to further
differentiate incident records for reporting purposes. For example,
you could select Other to identify contract service areas or special
circumstances.
Name/Number
The name or number you enter based on the Type you selected.
3. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Customize Cities dialog.
After you complete this procedure, if you are using the Welcome Wizard, click the check box
labeled Don’t show this again if you do not want to wizard to display again, then click the box
next to 6) Finished, Go To Desktop.
3-27
Entering Streets
As part of the FireRMS setup process, you need to add all the streets in your service area. This
should be done prior to creating incident reports or performing any other data entry tasks. These
streets are added to the Street Finder, which is available to users anywhere a street can be entered in
FireRMS.
To define the streets in your service area:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Streets. The Customize Streets
dialog displays.
2. On the Streets tab, click the New button.
3. Enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-11 contains descriptions of the fields
on this tab.
3-28
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 3-11: Streets Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Search or
Show All Streets
Enables you to view all streets or search for a street. To search for
streets, click Search, type a street name in the text box, and click
the Search button. You can type a partial street name. For
example, type “P” and click the Search button to see all streets
that begin with the letter P.
City
The city for which you want to either enter streets or view streets.
To add cities to the list, use the Customize Cities dialog.
Prefix
The prefix of the street, e.g., N - North.
Street Name
The street name.
Street Type
The type of street, e.g., AVE - Avenue.
Suffix
The street suffix, e.g., S - South.
Aliases
Displays a dialog box, in which you can choose one or more
aliases for the street. You can choose the aliases from the list of a
street name that you previously entered. You may want to assign
an alias to a highway passing through a city that is known by two
names: the highway name and a street name within the city limits.
Alias Only
When checked, this box indicates this street name is not
legitimate.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to enter additional streets.
5. You have two choices:
Select
a street name and click the Blocks tab if you want to define block ranges for a
street. Follow the procedure in the next section.
Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close
the Customize Streets dialog.
3-29
Entering Block Ranges for a Street
You can define block ranges for your streets. Block ranges allow you to define the acceptable range
of values for address numbers on a particular street. Address numbers outside of the defined block
range are not allowed for the street.
To define the block ranges for streets:
1. On the Streets tab of the Customize Streets dialog, select the street for which you will
define blocks.
2. Click the Blocks tab, and click the New button.
3. Enter the information in the fields provided. Table 3-12 contains descriptions of the fields
on this tab.
Table 3-12: Blocks Tab Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Blocks for
The name of the street you chose on the Streets tab for which you
are selecting a block range.
Starting Block
The lowest possible address number in the block range.
Ending Block
The highest possible address number in the block range.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to enter multiple ranges for a street.
5. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
dialog.
After performing all the setup procedures in this chapter, you must create security groups for the
personnel and define their access rights.
For information on completing these tasks, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining
Access Rights” on page 3-31.
3-30
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Creating Security Groups and Defining Access
Rights
Security groups control user access to information in FireRMS. A designated security group gives
users access to the features they need while protecting data integrity and securing privileged
information. After creating security groups, you must define the access rights that the group has to
the FireRMS data. Access to data is derived from security objects that correspond to menu items,
forms, or the desktop. The level of access you assign to an object for the group controls the ability
of the members of a security group to access and modify data in FireRMS.
To create security groups and define access rights:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by Security.
2. On the Security Groups tab, click the New button. The Security dialog displays.
3. In the Security Group Name text box, type a name for the group.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each security group you want to create.
5. After creating all security groups, click the security group name for which you want to
define access.
6. Click the Access Rights tab.
Creating Security Groups and Defining Access Rights
3-31
7. Click the name of the object to which you want to restrict access.
8. Under Access Code, select a security object to which you want to change access and select
the following:
1
- Denies the users in the security group the ability to view or modify the selected
object.
2 - Allows the users in the security group to read but not modify the selected object.
3 - Allows the users in the security group to have full access (read/write) to the
selected object.
For information about each security object on the Access Rights tab and the access
you have with 1, 2, or 3, see “Access Rights Definitions” on page A-1.
9. Repeat Step 8 for each security object you want to change, then repeat steps 5 through 8 for
each group to which you want to define access.
10. OPTIONAL: Click the Preferences tab and select a default desktop from the Start Up
Desktop Page drop-down box for all security groups. The desktop you select will display
for all users.
11. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
Security dialog.
Another security option is also available to prevent users from setting up new or existing personnel
as members of any restricted security group. This option is available under Menu>Tools> Admin>
Security, SecLevel.
To enable this option:
1. Go to the System Settings tab and click on the new checkbox labeled Personnel Security.
2. Next go to the Security list (under Tools>Admin>Security) and use the new scroll boxes to
set security levels for each group. Groups with a higher security value are able to update the
security group in personnel to any group of the same or a lower value. You only need to
modify the values for groups that should have higher level securities.
The default level for all groups is zero.
For example: Security Group “SYS” has security Level 5. Security Group “SUPER” has security
level 4. All other security groups have security level 0 (default).
A user in the SYS group is able to assign anyone in personnel to be a member of the SYS
group or below.
A user in the SUPER group is able to assign anyone in personnel to the SUPER group or
below only, but not to anyone in personnel to the SYS group.
3-32
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
A
user in any lower level security group is able to assign anyone in personnel to any other
security group EXCEPT for SUPER or SYS.
Creating Personnel Security Settings
FireRMS 4.4 or later enables you to select security levels for users or groups of users, and restricts
users from setting up new or existing personnel as members of any restricted security group.
1. Click on the Tools menu, select Administration, followed by System and Settings.
2. You must first enable the personnel security groups option by checking on the Personnel
Security checkbox under More Settings.
3. Save your changes and exit the dialog box.
Applying Exclusions for Security Groups
You can also restrict users within a multi-tiered security system with Security Rights Authorization
without locking out access to all other security settings.
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by Security.
2. Select the Exclusions tab. Use the Name of Restricted Object and Security Group Name
tabs to assign or restrict security access to users.
3. Use the scroll boxes to set security levels for each group.
Groups with a higher security value are able to update the security group in personnel to
any group of the same or a lower value. You only need to modify the values for groups that
should have higher level securities. The default level for all groups is zero.
4. Save your changes and exit the dialog box.
Creating Local Help
FireRMS 4.4 or later allows you to add local help definitions for fields. Systems with multiple
databases can share the new local help through the SQL Utilities UDShare function.
To set up local help:
1. Go to Tools>Administration>System>Settings.
2. Select Initiate Design Mode from the box titled Dynamic Property Changes.
Creating Personnel Security Settings
3-33
3. Restart FireRMS locally.
4. Open any form in FireRMS locally and right click on any field on the form. The system
displays the Properties sheet.
5. Use the Help Info tab to bring up the local help form for any field and enter information.
You must enter a title if you want to share this information across multiple databases. Press
save and close when you are done entering the information.
Note: Local Help is saved in XML file format. It is important to follow the rules for XML
Formatting especially for non-alpha characters when you are creating local help.
Characters such as angle brackets (<) and (>) are not supported in XML unless they include
special wrappers. Administrators are advised to restrict local help entries to basic alpha,
numeric and punctuation characters to avoid display issues or to ensure data entered is
XML compliant.
Exporting and Importing Local Help across Multiple
Databases
To export and import local help across multiple databases:
1. Launch SQL Utils and lock the database where the help was created.
2. Go to the UDShare tab and click on the sub tab labeled Export.
3. Click on the dropdown arrow and highlight the <CUSTOM HELP> choice from the
displayed list of options.
4. Enter a filename in the field labeled Save as File and use the required .XML extension for
the filename.
5. Click the Export button. This changes the local help into an XML file that can be stored on
a local server. You may optionally click on the 'browse' button to store the file in any
network location.
6. After you have created the XML file, lock the database into which you wish to import the
Local Help data.
7. Go to the UDShare tab and click on the sub tab labeled Import.
8. Click on the browse button and select the XML file created in the previous step.
3-34
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
9. Click on the Load from File button to run the import process.
When the import is complete, the help text set up for each field in the first database displays
in the second selected database.
10. Repeat the import process for each additional database.
Creating Local Help
3-35
3-36
Chapter 3: Performing Initial Set Up Procedures
4
4
Chapter 4:
Customizing Additional Modules
This chapter describes how to customize the remaining FireRMS modules. You only have to
customize the modules you plan on using. You will customize these modules using the commands
on the Tools menu. The remaining modules include:
Customize Hydrants - The Customize Hydrants selection enables you to perform customization
tasks specific to the Hydrants module. This includes creating a list of hydrant related actions,
identifying staff, and defining a hydrant numbering scheme.
Customize Occupancies - The Customize Occupancies selection enables you to perform
customization tasks specific to the Occupancies module. This includes creating a list of
occupancy-related actions and assignments, setting up an occupancy-numbering scheme, and
defining building codes for use in occupancy descriptions.
Customize Incidents - The Customize Incidents selection allows you to perform customization
tasks specific to the Incidents module, such as setting billing rates used by agency resources or
selecting default settings.
Customize Vehicles and Equipment - The Customize Vehicles and Equipment selection module
allows you to perform customization tasks specific to the Vehicles and Equipment module. This
includes creating lists of vehicle and equipment related actions, creating a list of equipment
categories, and creating an assignment list for vehicles and equipment.
Customize Training - The Customize Training selection allows you to perform customization
tasks specific to the Training module. You can create your classes, objectives and skills, credentials
and training standards, and define the default results for classes and objectives/skills.
Customize Other Entries - The Customize Other Entries selection allows you to perform
customization tasks specific to the Other Entries module. Specifically, you can define the default
results for other entry events.
In addition to customizing the remaining modules, you can customize the following items in
FireRMS:
4-1
Advanced EMS Protocols - You can design Advanced EMS protocols that are displayed
on the Flow Chart tab.
Default Result Fields - You can define the default results fields on the Class Explorer, the
Objective Explorer, the Participants tab, and the Objectives/Skills tab.
Tabs: Labels, Sort Order, Visibility - You can customize tab labels, sort order, and
visibility for Advanced EMS, Basic, and Incidents tabs.
Custom Tabs for Incidents and Advanced EMS - You can create custom tabs for
Incidents and Advanced EMS. You can create text boxes, combo boxes, check boxes, and
labels for these tabs.
Object Properties for All Modules - You can reposition fields, change the visibility, or
indicate the fields are mandatory or recommended. You can also, change field labels or hide
them.
Customizing Hydrants
You will customize hydrants by creating a list of actions to be assigned, identifying staff that can be
assigned hydrant activities, and selecting a hydrant numbering scheme.
Creating Hydrant Actions
You can create a list of hydrant-related actions in FireRMS. These actions are added to look-up
tables (drop-down lists, Explorers) in the Hydrants module. Users who are scheduling
hydrant-related actions can select these actions.
To create hydrant actions:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Hydrants.... The Customize
Hydrants dialog displays.
2. On the ACTIONS tab, click the New button.
4-2
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
3. In the Code text box, type an action code for the inspection. This unique number is used to
identify the action in the Hydrants module. You may enter up to 14 alphanumeric
characters.
4. In the Description text box, type a description of the action. This is used in addition to the
code to identify the action in the Hydrants module.
5. In the Default Fee text box, enter a default dollar amount for the action.
6. In the Priority text box, assign a priority level to the action. This indicates, to the user, the
order in which the actions should be performed. A number one is the highest priority and
number nine is the lowest.
7. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
dialog.
Selecting Staff To Be Assigned Hydrant Activities
You can identify staff available for assignment to hydrant activities. These entries are added to the
Assignment Explorer, which is used by data entry personnel to assign actions in the Hydrants
module.
Customizing Hydrants
4-3
To select staff to assign hydrant actions:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Hydrants. The Customize
Hydrants dialog displays.
2. On the ASSIGNMENTS tab, choose one of the following:
Click
Persons to identify a specific person available for assignment (for example, Joe
Brown) and click the New button.
a) In the ID text box, enter a label to identify the entry (for example, Fire Marshall).
This label will help data entry personnel find the entry on the Assignment Explorer.
b) Click the Explorer button to display the Personnel Explorer dialog, select a person
and click the OK button. The Code text box is filled with the person’s Employee
Number.
Click Department Structure to identify a structure level and location available for
assignment (for example, Station, Station 10) and click the New button. If you choose
Department Structure, whomever fills the position is responsible for the assigned
action.
a) In the ID text box, enter a label to identify the entry. For example, “RepHydrants.”
This label will help data entry personnel find the entry on the Assignment Explorer.
b) Select the following:
Level - Select a department structure level.
Location - Select a location within the selected level.
Apparatus - If applicable, select an Apparatus available for the assignment.
4-4
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Shift - If applicable, select a Shift responsible for the assignment.
3. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes and close the
dialog.
Selecting a Hydrant Numbering Scheme
The hydrant numbering scheme you select determines how these numbers are assigned in the
Hydrants module. Each hydrant must have a unique identification number in FireRMS.
To create a hydrant numbering scheme:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Hydrants.... The Customize
Hydrants dialog displays.
2. On the Numbering tab, select one of the following radio buttons:
No
autoincrement - Indicates each new hydrant number must be manually assigned
by data entry personnel. FireRMS will prevent you from re-using the same number.
Auto Number existing field beginning at last highest number - Indicates FireRMS
automatically assigns the next sequential number based on the highest hydrant number.
For example, if the highest hydrant number is 000120, the next hydrant number would
be 000121. Enter the starting hydrant number in the text box, e.g., 0001 or HYD-0001.
Customizing Hydrants
4-5
Insert
Mask and prompt next number in sequence - Creates a numbering scheme
based on fire management zones. Under this system, when a new occupancy is created,
the zone number is applied followed by the next sequential number. For Example: If
you have fire management zone 1901, each hydrant number would consist of 1901 plus
a unique code--1901-001, 1901-002 and so on.
a) Click the New button to add a new Fire Management Zone (FMZ) number to
FireRMS. The following fields display:
Code - The zone number.
Description - A description of the zone.
Default FMZ code - Makes the selected zone number the default number, which is
the number that always appears first when you create a new hydrant entry.
3. Click the Close Toolbar button and click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes.
Customizing Occupancies
When you customize Occupancies, your users can:
Create
a list of occupancies in your service area
Schedule building related actions such as inspections and record the results
Maintain detailed records on each occupancy
Create occupancy-related letters
Setting a Default View For the Occupancies Activities Tab
You can select a default view for the Activities tab of the Occupancies module. You can change this
view within the Occupancies module, but it is always reset to the default view.
To select a default view:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Default View of Activities List drop-down list box select one of the following
default views:
Single List - Displays Actions and Findings together in a single list.
Double List - Displays Actions and Findings on separate lists.
Custom List - N/A
4-6
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Creating a List of Building-Related Actions
You can create a list of building-related actions such as inspections, pre-plan visits and public
education events, that can be assigned to occupancies in FireRMS.
To create a list of building-related actions:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Actions tab, click the New button.
3. In the Code text box, type a unique action code of up to 14 alphanumeric characters for the
action. This number is used to identify the action in the Occupancies module.
4. In the Description text box, type a description of the action. The description helps users
identify the action in the Occupancies module.
5. OPTIONAL: Type a default dollar amount, in the Default Fee text box.
6. In the Priority text box, assign a default priority to an action, with 1 being the highest
priority and 9 being the lowest.
7. In the Reinspection Action field, select a default reinspection action for each activity by
selecting a code from the list if you are using FireRMS Mobile clients to complete
occupancy reports. When a mobile client completes an Occupancy inspection, this default
Customizing Occupancies
4-7
value can be used to schedule a reinspection, or you can clear the field, or select an alternate
activity as appropriate.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each action you want to create.
Creating a List of Occupancy Findings
You can create a list of findings that may result from an occupancy activity. These findings are
added to look-up tables (drop-down lists, explorers) in the Occupancies module and can be selected
by users who are entering the results of occupancy-related activities.
To create a list of occupancy findings:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Findings tab, do one of the following:
Click
the Findings node (top level node) on the tree view, and click the New button to
add a new group to the tree view. A group is a logical collection of individual findings
that makes it easier to locate findings in the tree view.
a) Enter the group name in the Group text box.
Click
the group in the tree view to which you wish to add a finding, and click the New
button. A finding is an individual event related to an occupancy activity, such as the
result of a permit inspection.
4-8
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
a) In the ID text box, enter the ID number for the finding, following your agency’s
code system. This number will be used to identify the finding in the Occupancies
module and on reports. You must enter a unique number for each finding.
b) In the Short Description text box, enter a brief description of the finding. This
description will be used on reports and will also be used with the code to identify the
finding in the Occupancies module and on reports.
c) On the Full Text tab, you can enter a more complete description of the finding.
d) You can click the Standards tab and then the Add button to relate a set of standards
to a finding. Types of standards you may want to relate to a finding include uniform
fire codes (NFPA Standards), uniform building codes, and so on.
For Dates - Indicates the Start and End date for which the standard is in effect.
Leave the End date blank while the standard is current.
Type - Indicates the category to which the standard belongs: Nat, State or Local.
Standard - Indicates the standard you want to relate to a finding, e.g., uniform fire
codes or uniform building codes.
Reference - Indicates any miscellaneous reference to the standard, such as an
edition number.
e) You can click the National Code Set tab and then the Add button to relate a set of
IFC standards to a finding if you have purchased licensing to integrate Electronic
IFC Code sets with your FireRMS database. You may associate one or multiple IFC
regulations with each finding. If your licensing model allows, additional IFC
regulations can be added to the Finding in the Occupancy module, or on the
FireRMS Mobile Occupancy report at the time an inspection is completed.
Caution: If you delete a Group, all findings in the Group are also deleted.
Entering Staff Available for Occupancy Assignments
You can identify staff available for assignment to occupancy activities, e.g., inspections. These
entries are added to the Assignment Explorer, which is used by data entry personnel to assign
actions in the Occupancies module.
To enter staff available for occupancy assignments:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
Customizing Occupancies
4-9
2. On the ASSIGNMENTS tab, choose one of the following:
Click
Persons to identify a specific person available for assignment, e.g., Joe Brown,
and click the New button.
a) In the ID text box, enter an ID number that is logically tied to a position assignment.
For example, the ID for station 51, shift C could be 51C. A logical system of ID
numbers can speed the reporting process and make it easier to identify the
assignments on which you wish to report.
b) Click the Explorer button to display the Personnel Explorer dialog, select a person
and click OK. The Code text box is filled with the person’s Employee Number.
Note: If a person transfers to a new position in the department, the replacement
automatically inherits the assignment.
Click
Department Structure to identify a position within the department structure
available for assignment, e.g., Station 1, Shift A, and click the New button. If you
choose Department Structure, whomever fills the position is responsible for the
assigned action.
a) Select the following:
Level - A department structure level.
Location - A location within the selected level.
Apparatus - If applicable, select an Apparatus available for the assignment.
Shift - If applicable, select a Shift responsible for the assignment.
4-10
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Creating a List of Occupancy-Related Permits
You can create a list of occupancy-related permits. Personnel select these permits when entering
permit information in the Occupancies module. FireRMS organizes permits into a tree view with
three predefined categories:
System - A permit for prevention and extinguishment systems.
Hazmat - A permit for hazardous materials.
Others - A permit for anything other than a system or hazardous material.
To create a list of occupancy-related permits:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Permits tab, select Systems, Hazmat or Others in the tree view and click the New
button.
3. Enter the ID number that will be used to identify the permit.
4. Type a description of the permit.
5. Enter the permit’s renewal cycle in months. For example, if a permit expires every 12
months, enter 12 as the renewal cycle in the Expires every text box.
6. In the Default Fee field, enter a default dollar amount.
Customizing Occupancies
4-11
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each permit you are entering.
Creating a List of Standards Linked to Occupancy
Findings
You can create a list of standards that can be linked to findings in the Occupancies module.
Standards can dictate the frequency of a fire extinguisher inspection. FireRMS organizes standards
into three categories:
National - Assigns a standard to the National category.
State - Assigns a standard to the State category.
Local - Assigns a standard to the Local category.
Once you enter the standards, you can link them to findings.
For more information, see “Creating a List of Occupancy Findings” on page 4-8.
To create a list of standards linked to occupancy findings:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Standards tab, select National, State, or Local in the tree view and click the New
button.
3. Enter a name for the Standard.
4-12
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to enter additional Standards.
5. When a Finding is associated with a standard, the finding Code and Description displays in
the Grid along with the From (start) and To (end) dates.
Sharing Occupancy Information Between Databases
FireRMS 4.4 or later allows you to share occupancy information between databases.
Go to Tools>Administration>Settings and select Occupancy Search from the More Settings
section. This allows you to search for and review occupancy data between multiple databases
located on a single SQL Server.
When the option is enabled, a new search option displays on the Occupancy List tab in the
Occupancy Module. You can select other databases to search, including All. You can also select a
search method, such as by name or by number, and then enter the search criteria.
Highlight the occupancy record that is displayed on the list grid tab and press the print icon to
display or print a report of the important occupancy information. Note that the system displays a
read-only or print only view of the information. You can display information that includes:
contacts, hazardous materials, systems, violations and building information.
All databases must have the system setting enabled in order to be accessed through this message. If
a database on the local server does not have the option enabled, it does not display in the list of
possible databases to be searched or the and the occupancy data from that database.
Creating Groups and Assigning Building Codes
You can create a list of sub-categories known as “groups” in any of the following four categories:
Construction Codes, Roof Codes, Occupancy Use Codes and Storage Tank Codes. Examples of
groups created under Construction Codes would be Floors, Windows, and Interior Walls. You can
also assign building codes to each group. After you add this information, personnel can select it
when they enter building information in the Occupancies module.
To create a list of groups and assign building codes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, Occupancies..., followed by Occupancies
The Customize Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Codes tab, select the Construction & Use Codes tab to assign codes to the groups
or select the Construction Code Groups tab to create groups.
Customizing Occupancies
4-13
3. Do one of the following:
If
you selected the Construction & Use Codes tab:
a) Select a group beneath one of the following categories: Construction Codes, Roof
Codes, Occupancy Use Codes, or Storage Tank Codes.
b) Click the New button.
c) Enter the code in the Code text box.
You can, additionally, make the following selections:
Retire Group - Click this check box to retire the group and all the construction use
codes. A date/time stamp is added to the customize page with the name of the person
who retired the code. Retired codes will no longer display in the drop-down lists on the
Occupancy module Building and More Building tabs. Existing occupancies where the
code had previously been assigned will display blank fields.
Retire Codes - Click this check box to retire construction use codes. Only the code is
retired, the group will still be active. A date/time stamp is added to the customize page
with the name of the person who retired the code. Retired codes will no longer display
in the drop-down lists on the Occupancy module Building and More Building tabs.
Existing occupancies where the code had previously been assigned will display blank
fields
Description - Enter a description of the code. The description appears next to the code
in the list box.
d) OPTIONAL: You can edit an existing code by highlighting it and modifying the
code in the text box. You can also delete an existing code by highlighting it and
clicking Delete. You are prompted to verify the deletion. Click Yes.
4-14
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Note: You can “un-retire” codes by clearing the Retire Codes check box. Un-retired
codes will re-display in field boxes on existing occupancies where it had previously been
assigned. Un-retiring a code clears the “retired” notation (date/time stamp and name) on
the Customize tab.
CIf you
B ildi
G the Construction Code Groups tab:
selected
a) Select the category or the group for which you are creating the new group.
b) Click the New button.
c) Enter the group in the Construction Group Code text box, e.g., floor or interior
walls.
d) Enter a description of the building feature in the Description text box.
You can also select the following:
Retired - Click this check box to retire construction use codes. A date/time stamp is
added to the customize page with the name of the person who retired the code. Retired
codes will no longer display in the drop-down lists on the Occupancy module Building
and More Building tabs. Existing occupancies where the code had previously been
assigned will display blank fields.
e) OPTIONAL: You can delete an existing group by highlighting it and clicking
Delete. You are prompted to verify the deletion. Click Yes.
4. Click the Save toolbar button.
Customizing Occupancies
4-15
Note: When you create a new group, it will not appear in the list box on the Construction
& Use Codes tab until you save your changes, close the Customize Occupancies dialog,
and re-open this dialog.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to enter additional building codes.
Creating Templates for Occupancy-Related Letters
You can create templates for occupancy-related letters. An example of occupancy letter is a
standard introductory letter sent prior to a new inspection.
To create templates for occupancy-related letters:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Letter Templates tab, click the New button.
3. In the ID text box, enter a name or number that identifies the template.
4. Enter an amount, in inches, for the top and bottom page margins. You can use half-inch
increments, e.g., 1.5 inches.
4-16
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
5. Type an amount, in inches, for the left and right page margins.
6. Type the text of the header and footer that appears in the letter.
7. Choose a selection listed in Table 4-1 from the drop-down list box and click the Insert
button. The list box contains information taken from the FireRMS database that is entered
into the template letter.
Note: Contact #1 is the first contact listed on the Occupancy Info > Contacts tab of the
Occupancies module.
Table 4-1: Template Field Selections
Selection
Description
Today’s Date
Inserts the current date (according to the workstation's system
settings).
Contact #1 Fullname
Inserts the first and last name of the occupancy contact, e.g., a
business manager.
Contact #1 Firstname
Inserts the first name of the occupancy contact.
Contact #1 Lastname
Inserts the last name of the occupancy contact.
Address
Inserts the occupancy address as entered in FireRMS.
City/State/Zip
Enters the occupancy city, state and zip code as entered in
FireRMS
Contact #1 Phone (Day)
Inserts the daytime phone number of the occupancy contact.
Contact #1 Phone (Night)
Inserts the nighttime phone number of the occupancy contact.
Occupancy Name
Inserts the name assigned to the Occupancy in FireRMS. The
occupancy name may be the name of the company leasing a
building.
Address
Inserts the address of the occupancy.
City, State, Zip
Inserts the city, state and zip code of the occupancy.
Occupancy ID
Inserts the ID of the occupancy.
Occupancy Phone
Inserts the phone number of the occupancy.
Customizing Occupancies
4-17
Table 4-1: Template Field Selections (Continued)
Selection
Description
Occupancy Fax
Insert the fax number of the occupancy.
Business License
Inserts the business license number of the occupancy.
Owner Full Name
Inserts the first and last name of the owner of the property.
Owner First Name
Inserts the first name of the owner.
Owner Last Name
Inserts the last name of the owner.
Owner Address
Inserts the address of the owner.
Owner City/State/Zip
Inserts the city, state, and zip code of the owner.
Owner Phone (Day)
Inserts the daytime phone number of the owner.
Owner Phone (Evening)
Inserts the nighttime phone number of the owner.
Occupant Full Name
Inserts the first and last name of the occupant of the property.
Occupant First Name
Inserts the first name of the occupant.
Occupant Last Name
Inserts the last name of the occupant.
Occupant Address
Inserts the address of the occupant.
Occupant City/State/Zip
Inserts the city, state, and zip code of the occupant.
Occupant Phone (Day)
Inserts the daytime phone of the occupant.
Occupant Phone
(Evening)
Inserts the evening phone of the occupant.
List Uncleared Findings
Inserts the most recent finding that does not have a cleared date.
This can be useful for including unresolved issues in the letter.
Next Action Date
Inserts the next date that an action is scheduled for the occupancy.
List Pending Activities
Inserts the activities not yet completed for the occupancy.
8. OPTIONAL: Click the Preview button to view or print the template.
Note: You can add text from external files into FireRMS text areas, such as the letter
template. Select the text in the source field and press CTRL+C. In FireRMS, click in the
text box you wish to insert the text and press CTRL+V
4-18
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Choosing an Occupancy Numbering Scheme
You must choose an occupancy numbering scheme in which each occupancy has a unique
identification number in FireRMS. The occupancy numbering scheme determines how these
numbers are assigned in the Occupancies module.
To choose an occupancy numbering scheme:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Occupancies.... The Customize
Occupancies dialog displays.
2. On the Settings tab, select one of the following options:
No
autoincrements - Indicates each new occupancy number must be manually
assigned by data entry personnel. FireRMS prevents you from re-using a number.
Customizing Occupancies
4-19
Auto
Number existing field beginning at last highest number - Indicates FireRMS
automatically assigns the next sequential number based on the highest occupancy
number. That is, if the highest occupancy number is 000120, the next occupancy
number would be 000121. Enter the starting occupancy number in the text box, e.g.,
0001 or OCCU-0001.
Insert Mask and prompt next number in sequence - Creates a numbering scheme
based on fire management zones. Under this system, when a new occupancy is created,
the zone number is applied followed by the next sequential number. For example, if you
have fire management zone 1901, each hydrant number would consist of 1901 plus a
unique code--1901-001, 1901-002 and so on.
a) Click the New button to add a new Fire Management Zone (FMZ) number to
FireRMS. The following fields display:
Code - The zone number.
Description - A description of the zone.
Default FMZ code - Indicates the selected zone number is the default number.
This number always appears first when you create a new occupancy.
Occupancy Module Options:
Copy Complex to New Subcomplex: Selecting this option auto fills or updates the
address from an original Occupancy when any other occupancy is set to be Part Of or a
Sub-complex or the original Complex. By default, the addresses for occupancies set as
Part of or Sub-Complex will NOT be changed.
Lock Occupancy ID: Selecting this option prevents users from changing any existing
Occupancy ID code.
3. Click the Close Toolbar button and click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes.
Note: The FMZ zones you create in this module are also used in the FireRMS Hydrants
module.
Customizing Incidents
You can customize Incident fields by setting billing rates for incidents, selecting forms for Aid
Given Codes to be completed in Incident reports, and creating a narrative template for incident
reports. You can also map your department’s EMS codes to another agency to whom you submit
EMS incident data.
Setting Billing Rates For Incidents
You can set billing rates for the use of your agency's resources in response to incidents. For
example, your department may charge a fee for units that respond to wildland fires outside of your
4-20
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
district. A FireRMS billing report is available which multiplies the billing Rate by the Amount to
calculate the dollar amount to be charged per resource use.
To set billing rates for incidents:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents, followed by Customize
Incidents. The Customize Incidents dialog displays.
2. On the Incident Billing tab, select Apparatus or Personnel as the Code Type, depending
on which type of resource for which you wish to set a billing rate.
3. In the Item list box, select the apparatus or personnel type for which you wish to set a
billing rate.
4. In the Rate 1 and Rate 2 text boxes, enter the dollar amount of up to two billing rates for
the selected apparatus or personnel type.
The fields for Amount 1 and Amount 2, appear on Incident Form’s Apparatus and
Personnel tabs. Rate 1, the first billing rate, is multiplied by Amount 1, and Rate 2, the
second billing rate is multiplied by Amount 2. Each calculation is the amount to be charged
for use.
The type of rate you apply depends on how your department charges for use. For example,
you could enter a rate per hour or rate per use. The amount you enter on the incident report
applies to the type of rate in use. For example, if the rate is per hour, you would enter the
number of hours used.
Customizing Incidents
4-21
Selecting Aid Given Codes Forms
You can select forms for Aid Given Codes to be completed in the Advanced EMS section of
incident reports. Aid Given Codes are used to describe medical actions taken during an Advanced
EMS incident. For each Aid Given Code, you can choose from a variety of forms. Each form
contains fields in which you record information for the medical action. The form you choose
depends on the type of information you want recorded for a particular Aid Given Code.
To select aid given codes forms:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents, followed by Customize
Incidents. The Customize Incidents dialog displays.
2. In the Aid Given drop-down of the Aid Given Codes tab, select the Aid Given Code for
which you wish to select a form.
3. In the Type drop-down list box, select the form that you want filled in when you select the
Aid Given Code in the Advanced EMS section of incident reports.
4. OPTIONAL: Enter a charge amount that will automatically be entered when a user selects
this “Aid Given.”
4-22
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Default Settings
You can select default settings for incident reports. You can set narrative text and default headings.
To select the default settings:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents, followed by Customize
Incidents. The Customize Incidents dialog displays.
2. On the Incident Defaults tab, select the response time threshold for incident responses.
When the first unit arrival time exceeds the response time threshold, the Response Time
label on the Incident Form's Basic > Response tab is red. To use this feature, type the
maximum response time allowed for incidents in the Response Time text box.
3. In the Assessment Category drop-down box, select the category with the heading you want
to rename.
4. In the Category Heading text box, change the caption to the one you want used for
Assessment categories on the Advanced EMS > Assessment tab.
5. In the Narrative Template text box, enter narrative text you want included in the Advanced
EMS section of the Incident Form.
6. OPTIONAL: You can indicate you want to use a Fire tab rather than a Wildland tab (the
default), for fire or wildland incidents. To use the Fire tab, select a fire or wildland incident
type from the Fire or Wildland drop-down list and click the Use Fire Form check box.
The Fire tab displays with this incident type when you enter information for this incident
type.
7. Click the Close Toolbar button and click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes.
Customizing Incidents
4-23
Mapping EMS Translation Codes
You can map your department's EMS codes to those of another agency to which you submit EMS
incident data.
Note: Before using EMS Translation Codes, you must have a custom export module that
is designed specifically for your code set. Contact Customer Support if you want an export
module developed for your department.
To map EMS translation codes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents, followed by EMS
Translation Codes. The EMS Translation Codes dialog displays.
2. Click OK when the View Parameter dialog displays. The EMS Translation Codes dialog
box displays.
3. Click the Explorer button next to the Export Module drop-down to select an Export
Module.
4. In the Code drop-down, click an EMS code category. The codes for this category are
displayed in the list box below the category. The Code text box displays the code for the
selected EMS code and the Description text box displays a description of the EMS code.
5. Select an EMS code from the list box, enter the code of the receiving agency in the Export
Code text box, and press the Enter key. Repeat this step for each EMS code in the list box.
4-24
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
6. Click the Close Toolbar button to save your changes. FireRMS automatically maps the
EMS codes to those of the receiving agency each time you export incident data using the
selected export module.
Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and
Locations
You can create a list of categories to which equipment and facilities can be assigned, select the
default measurement units (e.g., gallons, tons, inches), create a list of actions that can be assigned
to vehicles and equipment, and create a list of staff and positions available for assignment to
actions.
Note the following: You can use a checkbox labeled For MWO in the Vehicles and Equipment
module in Fire RMS 4.4 or later if you are running Maintenance and Work Orders (MWO). If you
are using MWO, enabling this checkbox allows an activity report to be sent to the MWO. It also
allows the local user to determine which activities require a work order and how to generate a work
order as needed.
Creating Equipment or Facilities Categories
You can create a list of categories and sub-category codes for equipment as well as categories and
codes for facilities.
Use the Equipment codes when creating new Equipment records in the Vehicles and Equipment
module.
Use the Facility codes when setting up Locations for Training Classes.
To create equipment or facilities categories or sub-categories:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Vehicles, Equipment, &
Locations. The Customize Vehicles, Equipment and Facilities dialog displays.
2. On the Categories tab, click either the Equipment or Facilities label on the tree view or,
click a sub-category, then click the New button.
Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations
4-25
3. Do one of the following:
If
creating a category, enter a name in the Group text box.
If creating a sub-category:
a) Select a group name from the Group drop-down box.
b) In the Code text box, type a unique alphanumeric code for the sub-category.
c) In the Description text box, type a description of the sub-category.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to create additional categories or sub-categories.
Caution: If you delete a category, all equipment in that category is also deleted.
Setting Default Measurement Units
You can select the default measurement units, e.g., gallons, tons, inches, for the Vehicles and
Equipment module.
To set default measurement units:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Vehicles, Equipment, &
Locations. The Customize Vehicles, Equipment and Facilities dialog displays.
4-26
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
2. Click the Defaults tab.
3. From the following units of measurement, select a default measurement from the
drop-down lists:
quarts,
gallons, or liters
or liters
ci, cc, or liters
lbs, tons, kg, or mt
in or cm
gallons
Creating a List of Equipment Actions
You can create a list of actions to be performed on your vehicles and equipment in FireRMS. These
actions are added to look-up tables (drop-down lists, explorers) in the Vehicles and Equipment
module and can be selected by users who are scheduling actions.
To create a list of equipment actions:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Vehicles, Equipment, &
Locations. The Customize Vehicles, Equipment and Facilities dialog displays.
Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations
4-27
2. On the Actions tab, click Vehicle or Equipment on the tree view and click the New button
to add a new action.
3. OPTIONAL: Select an action from the tree view and click the Delete button to remove it.
4. Type an action code of up to 14 alphanumeric characters. This code is used to identify the
action in the Vehicles and Equipment module.
5. In the Description text box, type a description of the action. This is used along with the
code to identify the action in the Vehicles & Equipment module.
6. If applicable, type a dollar amount for the default fee in the Default Fee text box.
7. In the Priority text box, assign a priority to an action, with 1 being the highest priority and
9 being the lowest.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 to create additional actions.
4-28
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Creating Staff or Department Structures Available For
Assignments
You can create a list the people or department structures available for vehicle or equipment
assignments. These entries are added to the Assignment Explorer, which is used by data entry
personnel to assign actions in the Vehicles and Equipment module. You can choose from the
following:
Vehicle - Indicates vehicle-related assignments.
Equipment - Indicates equipment-related assignments.
Person - Identifies a specific person available for assignment, e.g., Joe Brown.
Department Structure - Identifies a position within the department structure available for
assignment, e.g., Station 1 Shift A.
To create a list of people or department structures:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Vehicles, Equipment, &
Locations. The Customize Vehicles, Equipment and Facilities dialog displays.
2. On the Assignments tab, click either Vehicle or Equipment in the tree view.
3. Select one of the following in the tree view and click the New button to create a new entry.
Persons
Customizing Vehicles, Equipment, and Locations
4-29
a) In the ID text box, type a label to identify the entry, for example, “Joe Brown” or
“Fire Marshall.” This label will help data entry personnel find the entry on the
Assignment Explorer.
b) Click the Explorer button to select a person from the Personnel Explorer.
Department Structure
a) In Department Structure, identify a position available for assignment.
Level - Select a department structure level.
Location - Select a location within the selected level.
Apparatus - If applicable, select an Apparatus available for the assignment.
Shift - If applicable, select a Shift responsible for the assignment.
Note: ZOLL recommends that you select Dept. Structure as the Type instead of Person. If
a person transfers to a new position in the department, the replacement automatically
inherits the assignment.
4. Repeat Steps 2 through 3 to create additional people or department structures.
5. Click the Close Toolbar button and click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes
Defining Additional Roles for your Personnel
You can define the fields for identifying the specific role of each crew member attending an
incident. For example, a crew member may be defined as a fire fighter in Personnel, but for a
specific incident, your department may also wish to note that he was the apparatus driver.
To define additional roles for your personnel:
1. To add codes, go to Tools>Customize>Codes>Department codes.
Select the Additional Role checkbox.
2. Restart FireRMS to update all the codes into the local cache files.
3. Go to File>New>Incident and start a new incident report, if needed.
Go to the Resources tab on the incident form, and press add to add an apparatus. When the
apparatus finder form displays, click on the radio button ‘show all apparatus’ and then just
highlight any of the listed apparatus & click on the ‘select’ button. This enables you to add
the apparatus to your incident.
4. Go to the next tab titled Personnel. Assuming you have not created a roster, the personnel
list will be empty. Press the ‘add’ button on this tab and the Personnel explorer will display.
By default the list displays in ‘dept’ order. Click on the scroll box under the label in the
upper left corner (Select Tree View) and change it from ‘Personnel’ to ‘Alphabetical’.
This provides a list of personnel sorted alphabetically by last name. Pick the person whose
4-30
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
role you want to change, or assign.Or you can double click on the name, you’ll see if
display in the ‘Selected Personnel’ list box in the lower right. Add the person and click on
the OK button to close the explorer form and return to the incident.
5. A Position In Vehicle choice box becomes available and you will see and be able to select
the codes & descriptions you entered under Dept Codes.
6. Enter the additional role for the person during the incident in this dialog box.
7. Save your changes and exit the dialog box.
Customizing Training
You can customize training by adding sub-categories, entering standards, entering objectives and
skills, creating classes, creating credentials related to training classes, and setting up training
default results. Standards enable you to track standards compliance based on training.
You create classes using predefined FireRMS classes. You can create training classes that measure
your progress toward a goal. You can also define default objectives and skills for a training session.
Adding Sub-Categories and Creating Standards
The Standards Explorer contains three preset categories; National, State, and Local. You can create
standards in these categories. You can also create sub-categories beneath these three categories and
then create standards in the sub-categories.
Standards can be linked to objectives and skills in the Training module to allow you to track
standards compliance based on training. For example, if your district is held to NFPA performance
standards, you could enter these standards in the Standards Explorer, then link them to specific
skills taught in your training classes. When a participant completes a training class and obtains a
skill, the standard is cross referenced, demonstrating that the participant is trained in accordance
with standards.
For information about linking standards to objectives and skills, see “Creating a List of
Objectives and Skills” on page 4-33.
To add sub-categories and create standards:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Training, followed by Standards. The
Standards Explorer dialog displays.
Customizing Training
4-31
2. Click the category to which you want to add a new sub-category; National, State, or Local,
and click the New button.
3. Click the Category radio button.
4. In the Code text box, enter an alphanumeric code to represent the category.
5. In the Description text box, enter a category name.
6. Click the Save button.
7. Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to add additional sub-categories to the same category or Steps 2 to 6 to
add sub-categories to a different category.
8. Click the category or sub-category to which you wish to add the new standard.
9. Click the New button.
10. Click the Standard radio button to create a new standard.
11. In the Code text box, enter an alphanumeric code to represent the standard.
12. In the Description text box, enter a standard name.
13. OPTIONAL: Click the UnDo button to cancel your most recent unsaved changes.
14. Click the Save button.
4-32
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
15. OPTIONAL: Click the Print button and click OK to display the Print dialog box. You can
then preview or print the list of categories and standards.
16. Click OK after entering categories and standards.
Creating a List of Objectives and Skills
You can create a list of objectives and skills for your training classes. Objectives and skills are the
abilities, certification, or knowledge gained by personnel. Objectives are knowledge-based, while
skills are demonstrable. For example, an objective is to know the firefighter's role in the agency; a
skill is to demonstrate the ability to properly place a ground ladder. You will group your objectives
and skills beneath categories.
To create a list of objectives and skills:
1. In the Tools menu, click Customize, then select Training, followed by Objectives/Skills.
The Objective/Skills dialog displays.
2. Click Objective and Skills in the tree view and click the New button to create a category or
click a category and the New button to add objectives/skills or a sub-category.
3. Enter the following information:
Code - An alphanumeric code that represents the category, objective or skill.
Type - Includes Cat (Category), Obj (Objective), or Skill to create a category or an
objective or a skill. If you selected an objective/skill and you select Cat (Category), you are
Customizing Training
4-33
prompted to remove objective/skill specific information and convert the record to a
category.
Assigned Category - Displays the category to which the selected entry is assigned. You can
assign an entry to a category by clicking the category you want on the tree view.
Description - A description of the category, objective, or skill.
Sub-Tabs - Displays the sub-tabs if you choose either Obj or Skill. You can make selections
from the fields in the sub-tabs listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: Objective/Skill Selections
Field
Description
Details
A more detailed description of an objective or skill.
Standards
Link an objective or skill to a specific standard or series of
standards on the Standards tab. This is useful if an objective or
skill is tied to compliance with local, state or federal standards.
The Type text box displays the name of the standard you select.
The text box displays a description of the standard. In the Valid
Dates fields, enter the Start and End date for which the standard
is in effect. Leave the End date blank while the standard is current.
In the Reference field, type any miscellaneous reference to the
standard, such as an edition number.
Notes
Enter miscellaneous comments for an objective or skill. Click the
Date Stamp option to insert the current date and time (according
to your system) into the note.
Results
Contains three user-defined fields that allow you to store default
results for an objective or skill. These results will be used by the
Training module when the objective/skill is selected for a class.
4. Click the Save button.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to create additional categories or to create objectives and skills
beneath the categories.
6. OPTIONAL: Select the objective/skill or category you wish to delete and click the Delete
button.
Note: You cannot delete categories that have objectives/skills assigned to them.
7. Click OK when you have entered all your categories, objectives, and skills.
4-34
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
The Objective Explorer organizes objectives and skills into categorized folders in a tree view.
Note: A memo field Full Text has been added to Training Standards form.Use this field
to fill out additional text regarding the standard and display for the user when setting up
Class Objectives and Skills. When the class is later added to the Training Module, clicking
on the specific standard on the Class objectives and skills tab allows the end user to read
the full text in the description.
Creating Classes
You can create and modify classes for the Training module. FireRMS provides a set of predefined
classes that you can use, modify, or delete.
To create classes:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Training, followed by Classes.
2. Click Training Classes in the tree view and click the New button to create a category, or
click a category and the New button to add a class or a sub-category.
3. Enter the following information:
Code - An alphanumeric code that represents the category or class.
Type - Indicates a Category or Class.
Customizing Training
4-35
Assigned Category - Displays the category to which the selected entry is assigned. You can
assign an entry to a category by clicking the category you want on the tree view.
Description - The name of the category or class.
Retired - Indicates a class, is “retired” or hidden from the Class Explorer in the Training
module. This prevents data entry personnel from selecting it. However, FireRMS saves the
class record and you can still view and modify it by accessing the Class Explorer from the
Tools Customize menu.
Enter information on any of the following sub-tabs; Defaults, Results, Notes, Obj/Skills,
Attach, Resources.
Defaults - Enter information in the text boxes and drop-down boxes provided:
Standard - Displays any standard (NFPA, for example) that may be applied to this
class. This field is primarily for FireRMS Standard Edition users who do not have the
ability to link standards to objectives and skills. This field is not reportable.
Reference - A miscellaneous reference to the standard, such as an edition number.
Mandatory - Indicates this is a mandatory class. For example, some training may be
mandatory to achieve a certification or position.
Accredited - Indicates this class is part of an accredited training program for which
college credit or certification from a third party agency is given.
Preregistration - Indicates you want to include preregistration information, in the
default class description. After selecting this option, enter the desired Min. Class Size
and Max Class Size. The Max Class size determines how many participants can be
added for the class in the training module. Once the number of participants equals the
Max Class Size, the class will be marked as full on the Training Form.
Min Class Size and Max Class Size - The minimum and maximum number of class
participants.
Method - A default training method for the class.
Provider - A default provider for the class.
Note: You can change Method, Provider and other options for individual classes once
they are scheduled in the Training module. The purpose of these options is to provide class
defaults to speed data entry.
Results - Enter default results in the text boxes and drop-down boxes provided. Default
results include Credit Hours plus three user-definable fields.
Credit Hours - The credit hours needed for training for each objective and skill.
Default Result 1, 2, 3 - You can store the default results for each objective and skill.
These results are passed to the Training module when the class is scheduled.
Note: You can configure the user defined results fields using the Customize Results
dialog. For more information, see “Customizing Default Results for Other Entries” on page
4-50.
4-36
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Notes - Enter miscellaneous comments about a class in the text boxes and drop-down boxes
provided.
Class Notes - Record general notes about a class.
Prerequisite Notes - Record notes specific to the class prerequisites.
Date Stamp - Inserts the current date and time into a note.
Obj/Skills - Enter a default set of objectives and skills for a class.
a) Click the Add Object to Class button to add an objective or skill to the class, then
double-click the objective and click the OK button.
b) Click the Explorer button to open the Objective Explorer to view the selected
objective or skill.
c) Default Hours - Indicates default hours needed for training for each objective and
skill.
d) Default Result 1, 2, 3 - These three user-defined fields allow you to store the
default results for each objective and skill. These results are passed to the Training
module when the class is scheduled.
Note: You can store default objectives and skills for a class in the Class Explorer. You can
enter these in the Training Form's Objectives/Skills tab when you schedule the class and
you can assign them to class participants. Or, if you prefer, you can enter values on the
Training Form when you schedule the class.
Attach - Create, open, or remove file attachments for a class, such as a lesson plan.
a) Click the New button to create a new file attachment. Click the Browse button to
select the file you want to attach.
b) Click the Open button to open the selected file attachment.
c) Click the Delete button to remove a file attachment.
Description - A description of the attached file.
Linked to - The path of the attached file.
Browse - The list of files you can choose from to attach.
Comments - Any notes you want to store with the file attachment.
Resources - Indicate the resource you want to attach to a class.
a) Choose the resource from the tree view.
b) Click the Add Resource to class button.
c) Choose the resource from the Location Resources dialog.
d) Click the OK button.
4. Click OK to save changes.
5. OPTIONAL: Click the UnDo button to cancel your last unsaved change.
Customizing Training
4-37
6. Click the Save button to save a new category or class, or to apply the changes you have
made to an existing entry.
7. OPTIONAL: Select a class or category you wish to delete and click the Delete button. If
you delete a category, all classes in that category are deleted.
8. Click OK after you have created the classes.
The Class Explorer organizes classes into categorized folders in the tree view to which you can add
categories and classes as needed.
Creating Credentials
You can create a list of credentials related to your training classes. Credentials are used to measure
a person's progress towards a particular goal, such as a certification. A credential can have initial or
renewal requirements. An initial credential requirement is one that is required up front. For
example, a person may have to become a member of a team or gain certification. A renewal
credential requirement is one that is required to remain accredited. For example, a person must
remain accredited to stay on a team or remain certified.
The five categories of credentials are:
Certifications - The credentials required to receive a certificate of achievement--classes
passed, skills attained, actions taken in the field. For example, an EMT Basic certificate
might require 160 training hours in specific objectives and skills.
Degrees - The credentials required to earn a degree. For example, college or technical
degree curriculum.
Courses - The credentials required to complete a course. e.g., a CPR course.
Team - Credentials required to become a member of a team, such as Hazmat. These consist
of classes, objectives and skills or actions taken that must be met by all team members.
Other - A catch-all category for credentials that do not fall into the other categories.
To create credentials:
4-38
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Training, followed by Credentials. The
Credentials dialog displays.
2. Select a credential category; Certifications, Degrees, Team, Other, or Courses.
3. Click the New button to add a new credential.
4. Enter the basic information to create the credentials on the Definition tab. The fields are
described in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3: Credentials Tab Fields
Field
Description
Code
A unique alphanumeric code for the credential.
Description
A brief description of the credential.
Type
The category to which the credential belongs.
Expiration Term
The number of months after which the credential will expire.
Effective Date
Beginning date that the credential went into effect.
Customizing Training
4-39
Table 4-3: Credentials Tab Fields (Continued)
Field
Description
Local Qualifications
If selected, local qualification options are activated for this
credential definition when it is associated with personnel in the
Credentials Earned Explorer. Open the Credentials Earned
Explorer, by clicking Personnel on the Info menu, and then
clicking Credentials Earned.
Obsolete Date
The date that a credential becomes obsolete.
Comments
Miscellaneous notes about the credential.
5. Enter the requirements to receive a credential on the Requirements tab:
Code - The code of the credential to which you are adding requirements.
Description - A description of the credential to which you are adding requirements.
6. On the Identification sub-tab of the Requirements tab, choose from the following options:
Objective/Skill - Indicates the requirement is related to an objective or skill.
Category/Class - Indicates the requirement is related to a class or category of classes.
Credential - Indicates the requirement is to obtain another credential.
Actions Taken - Indicates the requirement is related to an action during an incident.
Aid Given - Indicates the requirement is related to a medical aid given in the Advanced
EMS module.
7. If you select one of the first three options, click the Explorer button to select a requirement.
A second dialog opens that allows you to choose from existing records. For example, if the
requirement is an objective/skill, the Objective Explorer opens. If you select one of the last
two options, choose an action or the aid given from the drop-down box.
4-40
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
8. On the Initial sub-tab or Renewal sub-tab of the Requirements tab, you can set a time
frame for completing a requirement when working towards the initial credential.
For a description of these fields, see “Setting Initial and Renewal Credential
Requirements” on page 4-42.
9. Click the Save button to save your changes.
10. OPTIONAL:
Click
the UnDo button to cancel your last unsaved change.
Click the Print button to print credentials. You can print the entire list or a selected
credential.
Click the Delete button to remove the selected requirement from a credential.
11. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Customizing Training
4-41
Setting Initial and Renewal Credential Requirements
When you are creating credentials, you can set the requirements on the Initial sub-tab or Renewal
sub-tab. The fields are described in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4: Initial or Renewal Sub-Tab Fields
Field
Description
Complete ___ time(s)
within ___ months
The number of times the requirement must be met within a given
time frame. Some requirements may only have to be met once.
Others, such as incident-related actions, may be required multiple
times.
with a minimum ___ of
___
You can set default results--test scores, time taken to complete a
skill, and so on--that must be met to successfully complete the
requirement. The available options are based on your user-defined
training and objective results. The drop-down list contains all
integer, numeric, and character based user-defined results. This
field is for required classes and objectives/skills, but it is dimmed
if there are no user-defined results of this type.
With a “Y” for ___ of
___
This field is similar to the “with a minimum” field except that it
uses user-defined Y/N (Yes/No) results. This field is dimmed if
there are no user-defined values of this type.
Accumulate ___ within
___ months
Uses user-defined training and objective results to allow you to set
minimum accumulation requirements. For example, a user might
be required to accumulate two minimum test scores within a year
to meet a requirement. This field is dimmed if there are no
user-defined results.
Renewal tab
Used when renewal requirements differ from initial requirements.
You can set the time frame for completing requirements needed to
renew a credential. This tab only applies when a credential must
be periodically renewed. The fields on this tab work as described
on the Initial tab.
You can click the Same as Initial button to match the Renewal requirements with the Initial
requirements. Values are taken from the Initial tab and inserted in the Renewal tab.
4-42
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Setting Up Default Objectives and Skills
You can define the default objectives and skills for a training session. In this case, the defaults are
passed to this tab when the class is scheduled. You can also add and delete objectives/skills as
needed for this particular session. Once the default results are in place, you can apply them to, and
modify them for, class participants using the Training Form/Participants tab.
To define default objectives and skills:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Training, followed by Objectives/
Skills.... The Objective Explorer dialog displays.
2. Select an objective or skill.
3. Click the Standards sub-tab and click the New button to add an objective or skill to this
training session. The Standards list box displays any standards that have been associated
with the selected objective/skill. The Results sub-tab contains user-definable fields that
display the default results for each objective/skill in the class.
4. Click OK after setting up default results.
Recording Objectives and Skills Achievements for
Participants
Use the Training Form / Participants tab to record objectives and skills achievements for
individual participants in the training class. For example, if a student is retaking a training session,
you can mark those skills that the student acquired the first time as completed.
To record objectives and skills for participants:
1. Click the Training tab on the desktop and open a class to display the Training Form.
2. Click the Participants tab and select the participant you want from the list box.
3. Click the Add Defaults button to apply the default objectives and skills as defined on the
Objective/Skills / Defaults tab. You can customize them as needed for individual
participants.
4. Click the New button to add an objective/skill for the selected participant.
5. Click the Delete button to remove the selected objective/skill from the student's list.
6. Use the Results options to measure a student's performance toward attaining objectives/
skills.
Customizing Training
4-43
7. Click the Completed check box when the student has successfully completed the selected
objective/skill. Clear this check box if a student has not yet completed the objective/skill.
8. Type the total hours that the student has completed in working towards the selected
objective/skill.
9. Click the Close Toolbar button to close the form.
Customizing Default Results Fields
You can define the default results fields on the Class Explorer, the Training Form’s Participant’s
tab, the Objective Explorer, and the Objectives/Skills tab on the Training form.
Setting Up the Class Explorer Default Results
The default results fields on the Class Explorer and on the Training Form’s Participants tab are
user-defined fields that allow you to record and store participant results.
To define the field labels and usage:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Training, followed by Results. The
Default Results dialog displays.
2. Click the Class Explorer Default Results tab.
3. Do one of the following:
Select
the Not Used check box if you do not want to use a field. The field will still be
visible to FireRMS users, but will be dimmed and labeled “NOT USED.”
Enter a Label, Data Type, and Default Value.
a) In the Label field, type the field label name using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
b) In the Data Type field, select one of the following type of data that will be entered
in the field:
Integer - Accepts whole numbers only (no decimals).
Numeric - Accepts decimal values.
One Character - Accepts a single alphanumeric character.
Six Characters - Accepts up to six alphanumeric characters.
Y/N - Accepts only the values “Y” or “N.”
c) In the Default Value field, type the value that you wish to appear as the default.
Note: The Data Type for the first two default results fields must be either Numeric or
Integer in order for certain reports in FireRMS to process data correctly.
4-44
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
4. Click Close when you are finished to close the Default Results dialog and save your
changes.
Setting Up the Objective Explorer Default Results
The default results fields on the Objective Explorer and the Objectives/Skills tab in the Training
Form are user-defined fields used to store and record results for your training participants. These
fields must be defined as part of the training setup process.
To set up the objective explorer default results:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, and Training, followed by Results. The
Default Results dialog displays.
2. Click the Objective Explorer Default Results tab.
3. Do one of the following:
Select
the Not Used check box if you do not want to use a field. The field will still be
visible to FireRMS users, but will be dimmed and labeled “NOT USED.”
Enter a Label, Data Type, and Default Value.
a) In the Label field, type the field label name using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
b) In the Data Type field, select one of the following type of data that will be entered
in the field:
Integer - Accepts whole numbers only (no decimals).
Numeric - Accepts decimal values.
One Character - Accepts a single alphanumeric character.
Six Characters - Accepts up to six alphanumeric characters.
Y/N - Accepts only the values “Y” or “N.”
c) In the Default Value field, type the value that you wish to appear as the default.
Note: The Data Type for the first two default results fields must be either Numeric or
Integer in order for certain reports in FireRMS to process data correctly.
4. Click Close when you are finished to close the Default Results dialog and save your
changes.
Customizing Advanced EMS Protocols
You can customize your own Advanced EMS protocols after changing the security object
Menu,Tools,Customize,Advanced EMS to 3. You can create a new protocol and add the treatments
via the treatment codes.
Customizing Advanced EMS Protocols
4-45
Note: Before customizing protocols, you must select all the version 2 forms, e.g.
CFlowChartPatientCarePage_v2, as the default forms on the Tab Control box.
For information on selecting version 2 forms, see “Customizing Tabs: Labels, Sort
Order, Visibility” on page 4-51.
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Advanced EMS, followed by
Protocols. The Protocols box displays. The left list box lists the Protocols and the right list
box lists the Treatment Work Flow.
2. Click New Protocol, enter the name in the Name text box and click Add.
3. Click the name of the protocol, and click the Add button beneath the Treatment Work Flow
list box to add treatment work flows. The Treatment Codes dialog displays.
4. Select the treatment code and click Add. The treatment codes display in the Treatment
Work Flow list box. Repeat this procedure to add additional treatment codes.
Note: If you will be exporting your protocols and importing them into other databases
using SQL Utilities, make sure the Treatment Codes in the source and destination databases
are the same. If they are not, when you import the protocols and then select
Tools>Customize>Incidents>Advanced EMS>Protocols, errors will display.
5. Click Exit when you are done.
4-46
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
6. Select a Treatment Work Flow and click Edit Defaults to enter or edit the default values for
this work flow.
7. OPTIONAL: Enter an Effective Date and End Date for this protocol. The protocol can only
be used during the dates entered.
8. Click the Close button.
9. Open an incident and click the Advanced EMS tab and the Flow Chart tab.
10. On the Protocols drop-down, select one of the protocols you created and click Add
Protocol. The Events for the protocol appear at the bottom half of the tab. You can click a
button to add the event to the bottom. You can reorder the event in the list by changing the
date and time. You can hide events in the protocol that will not be used for a patient. You
must enter a reason the event is not being used.
The protocol information used for each patient is saved.
Creating Advanced EMS Disclosures
You can create your own Advanced EMS Disclosures for use on the Mobile tablet. Disclosures are
declarations or statements that apply to advanced EMS patients. Disclosures consist of a title,
disclosure text, and a signature(s). An example of a disclosure you may create is; Title: Refusal of
Creating Advanced EMS Disclosures
4-47
Medical Care, Disclosure Text: Medical treatment is refused by patient, Signatures: Patient,
EMT.
Note: Before creating disclosures, if you will be creating disclosures in languages other
than English, you must first enter language types. Click the Tools menu, then select
Customize, then Codes, followed by Department Codes, and the category Language,
and enter language types.
To create the Advanced EMS Disclosures:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents, followed by Advanced
EMS, and Disclosures. The Disclosures dialog box displays.
2. Click the Add button in the top portion of the dialog and enter the Disclosure Title. (To
remove a disclosure, select the title and click the Delete button. The title, language, and text
are deleted.) You cannot create two titles with the same name, in the same language.
3. OPTIONAL: If you created multiple languages, click in the Language column and select a
language from the drop-down box. If you choose a language other than English, enter the
title, text, and signatures in that language.
4. Enter disclosure text in the Disclosure Text box.
4-48
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
5. Click the Add button in the bottom portion of the dialog and enter a signature. (To remove a
signature, select the signature and click the Delete button.) You can repeat this step to add
more signatures.
Note: After creating a Disclosure Title, Text, or a Signature, you can highlight the text in
these fields and modify the text.
6. Click the Save All button and repeat Steps 2 through 6 to add more disclosures or click the
Close Toolbar.
Before your users can view or modify the Disclosures tab, you must display the tab using the Tab
Control feature. When you do, it will appear on the Incident > Advanced EMS tab.
For information about displaying hidden tabs, see “Customizing Tabs: Labels, Sort Order,
Visibility” on page 4-51.
Preventing Unauthorized Users from Viewing
Patient Data on EMS Reports
To prevent unauthorized users from viewing patient data on EMS reports:
1. Go to Tools>Administration>System.
2. Click on the Settings tab. Go to More Settings and select the Lock PCR option. Selecting
the checkbox enables this feature.
3. When you create patient records using Advanced EMS or NEMSIS after enabling this
feature, you can use the Personnel Explorer icon on the Patient Information tab to select
names of personnel attending the Incident. You can also change the explorer view and make
selections from personnel based on Assignment, Roster, or from an alphabetical list of all
personnel. Once you have set up a member making report for the specific patient, only the
person selected (or an authorized reviewer) is able to view that patient’s data.
4. Save your changes and exit the screen.
NOTE: FireRMS 4.4 or later has added a new security option under Form> Incident>Advanced
EMS>All Patient Info. Use this option to designate the authorized reviewers of EMS Data. Users
must have their security group option set to 3 – Full Access to view the patient data for all Incident
Reports. This is irrespective of whether or not the user entering the data has locked the record by
selecting his or her name using the Personnel Explorer.
Preventing Unauthorized Users from Viewing Patient Data on EMS Reports
4-49
Customizing Other Entries
You can customize the Default Results fields on the Other Entries Form. You can indicate you want
the Default Results fields to be greyed out so they cannot be used. If you want the fields to be used,
you can customize the label name, choose the data type, and set a default value.
Customizing Default Results for Other Entries
You can create a set of default results for scheduled events in the Other Entries module. For
example, you could track total staff hours for an other entry event such as station maintenance.
To customize other entries:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Other Entries. The Other Entry
Results dialog displays.
2. Do one of the following:
Select
the Not Used check box if you do not want to use a field. The field will still be
visible to FireRMS users, but will be dimmed and labeled “NOT USED.”
Enter a Label, Data Type, and Default Value.
a) In the Label field, type the field label name using up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
b) In the Data Type field, select one of the following types of data that will be entered
in the field:
Integer - Accepts whole numbers only (no decimals).
Numeric - Accepts decimal values.
One Character - Accepts a single alphanumeric character.
Six Characters - Accepts up to six alphanumeric characters.
Y/N - Accepts only the values “Y” or “N.”
c) In the Default Value field, type the value that you wish to appear as the default.
Note: The first two data types are used by FireRMS to calculate personal activity reports;
these values should be numeric or integer data types to work properly. Some agencies use
these fields to measure attendance by counting total participation points.
The Sample column in the dialog box displays a sample value for the selected Data Type.
4-50
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Customizing Tabs: Labels, Sort Order, Visibility
Administrators can give users access via a new security object; Menu,Tools,
Customize,TabControl, to customize tab labels, visibility, and order for Advanced EMS, Basic,
Resource, Incidents, or user-defined Occupancy tabs. Also, users can select different forms for
some of the Advanced EMS tabs.
To customize tabs, sort order, or visibility:
1. Change the access to the security object Menu,Tools, Customize,TabControl to 3.
For a description of the procedure, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining Access
Rights” on page 3-31.
2. Click the Close button.
3. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Incidents or Occupancies followed by
Tab Control. A Tab Control box displays.
4. Do one of the following:
If
you selected Incidents:
a) Select the tab label, INCIDENT, BASIC, RESOURCE or ADVEMS.
If you selected Occupancies:
Customizing Tabs: Labels, Sort Order, Visibility
4-51
a) Select OCCUPANCYINFO or PREVENTIONINFO.
5. You can change the values in the Caption column or the Order column, and select or
deselect the Show check box.
Click
on the Caption, modify it, then press Enter.
on a number in the Order column and change it, then press Enter. The items are
reordered. Items categorized as NFIRS cannot be modified.
Select the Show checkbox at the bottom of the screen to display a tab. Deselect it to
hide the tab. Also, two versions can be displayed for some Advanced EMS tabs. These
alternate versions are indicated by version - 2 in the object name. Note that you must
select the same version numbers of the tabs, e.g. if you select Version 2 of one tab, you
must select Version 2 for the others.
Click
6. After making all changes, click the OK button. Changes are reflected on the Incident,
Basic, Resources, Advanced EMS, or Occupancy tabs of current incidents/occupancies and
newly created incidents/occupancies. Click Cancel to cancel all your changes.
Note: The Incident>Advanced EMS>Accident tab has a field under Accidents: the
Safety Device Reported by field can be populated by adding the code and descriptions
desired to the EMS Codes page under Customize Codes.
Creating Custom Tabs
Administrators can give users access via the security object; Menu, Tools, Customize, Tab Creator,
to create their own top level (parent) tabs in the following modules: Incidents, Occupancies,
Hydrants, Personnel and Vehicles & Equipment. Low level (child) tabs may also be created for
Incident – Advanced EMS and Occupancy – Prevention tabs. These tabs can contain text boxes,
combo boxes, check boxes, labels, a date/time field, and a Report button. Before creating a custom
tab, ZOLL recommends you create a rough draft of the tab containing the fields with the data you
want to enter. Creating a tab consists of the following steps:
Create
Save
Reset
SQL Permissions
Publish
Once tabs are published, or created and saved, you can edit them and then re-publish or re-save
them.
To create a new tab:
4-52
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
1. Change the access for the security object Menu,Tools, Customize,Tab Creator to 3.
For a description of the procedure, see “Creating Security Groups and Defining Access
Rights” on page 3-31.
2. Click the Close button.
3. Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then either Incidents or Occupancies, and
Tab Creator, followed by Create New. A Tab Creator Wizard box displays.
4. Select one of the following:
Incident
Tab Top Level or EMS Tab Lower Level
Info or Prevention Info
Occupancy
5. Click Next.
6. Do one of the following:
If you selected Incident Tab Top Level, Occupancy Info, or Prevention Info:
A) Enter the Tab Name in the text box and the Tab Caption in the text box.
B) The tab name must include alpha characters and may contain numeric characters.
C) Click Finish. The Page Creator window displays.
Or
If you selected EMS Tab Lower Level:
A) Select Incident or Patient.
B) Click Next.
C) Enter the Tab Name in the text box and the Tab Caption in the text box.
D) The tab name must include alpha characters and may contain numeric characters.
E) Click Finish. The Page Creator window displays.
Note: If you selected a Patient tab, you will notice a Patient drop-down box
automatically appears in the upper left corner of the screen. The fields you add on this tab
will contain data associated with each patient that you select when using this tab.
Creating Custom Tabs
4-53
6. Click Add Object. The Select an Object dialog, above, displays. Select one of the
following objects to add to the tab.
Label:
a) Select Label and click the Finish button. The object appears in the upper right
corner of the screen.
b) Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
Text Box:
a) Select Text Box.
b) Click Next. The Define Data Type box displays.
c) Enter a field name up to 35 characters.
d) Select the data type of Character and the length, or select Numeric.
e) Click Finish. The object appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
f) Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
Combo Box:
a) Select Combo Box.
b) Click Next. The Define Data Type box displays.
c) Enter a field name up to 35 characters.
d) Select the data type of Character and the length, or select Numeric. (You can only
select the value Numeric if you are creating either an Incident or an EMS tab. It is
not available if you are creating an Occupancy Info or Prevention Info tab.)
e) Click Next.
f) Select a category from the drop-down box.
4-54
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
g) Select an item in the list box and click Select. The item name displays and appears
in the Selected Category box.
h) Click Finish. The object appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
i) Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
Note: When you create a combo box, you select from a list of Categories. This list
contains the selections provided by the category <ADD NEW>. You can modify this list to
change your selections. (Click the Tools menu, then select Customize, then Codes,
followed by Department Codes, and the category <ADD NEW>.)
Check
Box:
a) Select Check Box.
b) Click Next. The Define Data Type box displays.
c) Enter a field name up to 35 characters. The default data type is Logical.
d) Click Finish. The object appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
e) Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
Date/Time Field:
a) Select Date / Time Field.
b) Click Next.
c) Enter a field name up to 35 characters. The default data type is Date/Time.
d) Click Finish. The object appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
e) Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
f) When you publish this tab, and enter data in this tab, the Date/Time field displays the
date and time of data entry.
Note: The Report Button object will be linked to a customized Crystal Report that you
create. Before choosing this object, you must create a report and you must install it in the
FireRMS5SQL directory on your local machine even it you are using centralized reporting.
When you add the Report Button, you are prompted for the name of the report. The report
is generated based on the Incident number/EMS Patient ID or the Occupancy ID number
that you enter when you create the report.
Report
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Button:
Select Report Button.
Click Next.
Enter the name of the report, e.g. Incident.rpt.
Click Finish. A Print button appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
Click on the object and drag and drop it to a location on the screen.
7. Repeat Step 7 and follow the procedures for each object you want to add to the tab.
8. OPTIONAL: To delete an object, drag it to the trash barrel in the bottom right corner and
drop it in.
Creating Custom Tabs
4-55
9. After creating objects, you can right-click on an object to display the Object Property Sheet
dialog box. You can hide or change a label, or you can hide a field, or change it's location on
the tab.
10. Click Save to save the tab and fields. A save message displays. Click OK. You are
prompted to reset permissions in SQL Utilities. Click OK. You must reset permissions
when you create tabs in order to display the correct data.
11. Close FireRMS and reset permissions in SQL Utilities by locking the database and clicking
Reset Permissions on the Maintain tab. When the update is complete, unlock the database,
close SQL Utilities and re-open FireRMS.
12. Reopen the tab you created by selecting Tools, then select Customize, then Incidents or
Occupancies, and Tab Creator, followed by Open Saved.
13. Select the tab name and click Finish.
14. Click Publish to save the tab and place it on the network. The new tab displays on the
Incident Form. If the tab is selected and permissions have not been set in SQL Utilities, the
text “Reset Permissions must be run from SQL Utils” appears on the tab. If at any time you
want to remove a tab, you can hide it using the Tab Control dialog box. Contact Customer
Support for information about deleting tabs from your system that you created.
Modifying Published or Saved Custom Tabs
You can modify published tabs, or tabs you have created and saved, but not yet published.
To modify tabs:
1. Click the Tools menu, then selecting Customize, then Incidents or Occupancies, then Tab
Creator, followed by Open Saved. A list of tabs you saved displays.
2. Select the name of a tab you want to modify. The Page Creator window displays.
3. Make changes to the tab, e.g. add objects or modify labels, and click Finish or Save. If you
edited a tab that is already published, you must:
Click
the Update Publish button after clicking Save, then click Close
Close FireRMS
Open SQL Utilities, reset permissions, and click Close
Re-open FireRMS to view the tab with all changes
4-56
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Changing the Tab Order of Objects
When you press the Tab key to move through objects on a tab, the default tab order is left to right
and top to bottom. Using the “Tab Index” property on the Object Property sheet, you can change
the order in which you tab through the objects on user-defined tabs.
To change the order in which you tab through objects:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, then System, followed by Settings.
2. Under Dynamic property changes, select Enabled.
3. Select the Initiate Design Mode check box.
4. Click the Close Toolbar button.
5. Open an incident.
6. Click on a user-defined tab.
7. Right-click in the object you want to reorder. The Object Property Sheet dialog displays.
8. In the Tab Index row and Target Value column enter the number for the tab order of the
object.
Creating Custom Tabs
4-57
9. Click Save.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for each object you want to reorder.
11. Click Save.
12. Deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box on the Settings tab after you have made all
changes.
FireRMS 4.4 or later has increased this functionality by expanding the User Defined option to most
fields in the default FireRMS user interface. Fields that are required by NFIRS may not have the tab
order changed as this could interfere with rules processing. All other fields may be modified to
have the tab order set as locally desired. This is especially helpful on systems where optional fields
are hidden using the Design Mode.
To set up local Tab Order for fields in the User Interface, initiate Design Mode and then right click
on any field. The system displays the Properties sheet.
There are two methods for changing the tab order – field by field, or form by form.
You may choose to update the tab order for a a single field. To do this, type in the new
desired value on the Tab Index line on the Properties Tab.
You may also choose to update the tab order for all fields on a given tab by accessing the
new Tab Order form on the Property Sheet.
Changing Object Properties For All Modules
Administrator’s can change the object properties for labels and fields in the Incident and
Occupancy modules. The objects that can be modified include: Text Boxes, Combo Boxes, Check
Boxes, and Radio Buttons. When you right-click on a label, an object property sheet displays. You
can edit the field label or you can hide the label.
When you right-click in a field, an object property sheet displays with settings to reposition the
field, select a default value for the field, hide the field, or display a field as mandatory or
recommended. Mandatory fields must be filled in. You cannot authorize an incident unless
mandatory fields are filled in. Before an incident report can be exported or used for reports, the
incident must be authorized. Recommended fields contain data that your department would like
you to enter, but you can authorize a tab without entering data in recommended fields.
Note: You can change the properties for objects that are NFIRS and function required if
the NFIRS rule applies to only the field’s character length. If you right-click in a field that
is NFIRS required, and the rule does not apply to only the field’s character length, the
words NFIRS Required appear next to the name in the Object Property sheet and no Object
Properties are listed in the sheet.
4-58
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Mandatory and Recommended
Fields, Repositioning Fields, or Changing Visibility
Administrators can indicate the fields on the tabs that will be mandatory or recommended. When
you enable these fields, they display in the color you selected.
For a description of the procedure, see “Displaying Mandatory and Recommended Fields” on
page 5-14.
You can also change the location of the field on the tab, the sort order, or change the visibility. The
objects that can be modified include: Text Boxes, Combo Boxes, Check Boxes, and Radio Buttons.
To change field properties:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, then System, followed by Settings.
2. Under Dynamic property changes, select Enabled. (You can also disable this feature.)
When Disabled is selected, no prior label changes are displayed; default values will display.
When this feature is enabled, system performance is diminished, but you can view any prior
label changes.
3. Select the Initiate Design Mode check box.
4. Select the Enable Recommended Fields and/or the Enable Mandatory Fields check box
and select the color you want the fields to display in. The tab labels of the fields will also
display in this color. You should inform your users of the colors you have chosen for
mandatory and recommended fields.
Changing Object Properties For All Modules
4-59
5. Click the Close Toolbar button to enable Design Mode. While in design mode, you can
make field and label enhancements.
6. Open an incident.
7. Right-click in the field you want to modify. The Object Property Sheet dialog displays.
8. Do the following:
Change
the visibility of that field
a) Click the Hide radio button next to Default to hide the field.
Reposition the field
a) Change the values in the Target Value column next to Top, Left, and Width.
Indicate the field is a mandatory or a recommended field
a) Click the radio button next to Mandatory or Recommend to indicate a Mandatory or
Recommended field. (These selections are greyed out if the Mandatory and
Recommended check boxes on the Settings table on the previous page are not
checked.) If you chose Mandatory, and you do not enter a Start Date the field will
display as mandatory in all new and existing records. If you enter a start date, the
fields will display as mandatory in records created as of that date.
4-60
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Note: When you choose a field to be mandatory in the Incident module, you must fill in
this and all mandatory fields before you can complete an incident. You can use design
mode to clear all mandatory fields on a tab if you later decide to hide the tab or change to
another version of the tab using the Tab Control option.
9. Click Save. Labels or fields that have been changed or hidden are highlighted in green.
10. Deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box on the Settings tab after you have made all
changes.
Changing Field Labels or Visibility
In addition to changing the properties for fields, administrators can also change the field labels or
hide the labels for all FireRMS modules. You are not allowed to change the labels on Command
buttons.
To change field labels:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, then System, followed by Settings.
2. Under Dynamic property changes, select Enabled. (You can also disable this feature.)
When Disabled is selected, no prior label changes are displayed; default values will display.
When this feature is enabled, system performance is slowed, but you can view any prior
label changes.
3. You can select the Initiate Design Mode check box and click the Close Toolbar button to
change to Design Mode. While in design mode, you can make field and label
enhancements.
4. Right-click on the label you want to modify. The Object Property Sheet dialog displays.
5. Do the following:
Change
the label name
a) Enter a new label name in the Target Value column next to Label.
Change the visibility of that field
a) Select the Hide radio button to hide the field.
6. Click Save. In Design Mode, labels or fields that have been changed or hidden are
highlighted in green.
7. Deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box after you have made all changes.
Changing Object Properties For All Modules
4-61
Assigning Default Values to Data Elements
You can assign a default value to data elements (text boxes or drop-down lists) on regular FireRMS
tabs, or published, user-defined tabs. When entering a value for a field with a drop-down list, the
value you enter must be a valid selection. For example, on the Incident>Basic>Location tab, you
can set the default value for the State field to be MA. (MA is one of the selections available in the
drop-down list.)
To select a default value for a data element:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, then System, followed by Settings.
2. Under Dynamic property changes, select Enabled. (You can also disable this feature.)
When Disabled is selected, no prior label changes are displayed; default values will display.
When this feature is enabled, system performance is slowed, but you can view any prior
label changes.
3. Select the Initiate Design Mode checkbox and click the Close Toolbar button to change to
Design Mode.
4. Right-click in a field on a regular FireRMS tab or a user-defined tab. The Object Property
Sheet box displays.
5. In the Default Value row and Target Value column, enter a valid value.
6. Click Save.
7. Deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box after you have made all changes.
4-62
Chapter 4: Customizing Additional Modules
5
5
Chapter 5:
Controlling User Settings
This chapter describes the tasks associated with controlling user settings for your FireRMS system.
Setting the Default Desktop
You can select the default desktop you want to display for your users.
To set the default desktop:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by Security. The Security
dialog displays.
2. In the Security Groups tab, click the Preferences tab.
3. In the Start Up Desktop Page drop-down, select one of the following default desktops:
Incidents
Training
Other
Entries
To Do Items
Log
4. Click the Close Toolbar to save your changes and close the Security dialog.
Using NT Logins
The Use NT Login feature bypasses the FireRMS login screen and accesses FireRMS via the
Windows NT login script. This is a useful feature when you have only one user per workstation. If
multiple people will be using one workstation, you may not want to use this feature.
To access FireRMS via NT Login:
5-1
1. Enter each user’s NT login name and password in their FireRMS personnel record. The
FireRMS login name and password must be the same as the NT login name and password.
For information about assigning a login name and password, see “Adding Personnel”
on page 3-21.
2. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
3. In the System Administration dialog, click the More Settings tab.
4. In the More Settings tab, select the Use NT Login check box.
5. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
Enabling and Disabling System Lockouts for
Invalid Logons
To set up an account lockout policy for your users:
1. Click the Tools menu, select Administration, followed by System and More Settings.
2. Set the value for the number of invalid log ons that you want your users to have in the Max
Logons box.
3. If the user is locked out and you have to reset the log on, go to the Personnel module and
select the Show locked out button. The system displays a drop down list with all the users
and the number of log on attempts.
4. To unlock a user’s account, select their name from the drop down list and clear the
checkbox next to the user’s name. You can also reset the user’s password, if needed.
5. Save your changes and ensure that all FireRMS clients restart their systems to recognize the
new settings.
Enabling Login Security/Protecting Daybook
and Desktop
Login security allows you to enforce the use of logins to access FireRMS. When login security is
enabled, users that are not using the NT Login feature must type a user name and password in order
to access FireRMS. Be sure the system administrator has all privileges assigned before selecting
this option.
5-2
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
With Protect Desktop checked (on), both Daybook and Desktop tab(s) will be restricted to the
department assigned level of the individual logged in. For instance, the captain at Station 1 will be
restricted to his/her station; the Battalion Chief in Battalion 1 will be restricted to his/her battalion.
When both Protect Desktop and Protect Daybook are unchecked (off), a user will default to his/her
level when running the application. The entire hierarchy of the department is accessible to them
from any tab on the desktop; Incidents, Training, Other Entries, and Daybook.
To enable login security:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, select the Enable Login Security check box.
4. In the More Settings drop-down, select the Protect Desktop check box to restrict both
Daybook and Desktop tabs to the department assigned level of the logged in user.
5. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
Turning On/Off the Welcome Wizard
The Welcome Wizard dialog appears the first time you start FireRMS and continues to appear each
time you run FireRMS until you turn it off.
To turn on/off the welcome wizard dialog:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click the Don't Show Welcome Wizard at Startup check box. You can
clear this check box at any time to reactivate the Welcome Wizard dialog.
4. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
Note: You can also turn off the Welcome Wizard that displays on your desktop by
clicking the Don’t show this again check box and the 6) Finished, Go To Desktop check
box on the bottom of the Welcome Wizard screen.
Disabling Automatic Incident Numbers
Numbers are automatically assigned to Incident reports when you create a new incident. If you
want to assign your own incident number you can disable this auto-numbering feature.
Disabling Automatic Incident Numbers
5-3
To disable automatic incident numbers:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click the Disable Automatic Incident Numbers check box.
4. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
When you save a new incident, you are prompted to enter a number in the Incident Number
text box.
Turning Off the Refresh Timer
The Refresh Timer updates FireRMS with changes from the database every 5 minutes. If this
causes performance issues, you can disable the Refresh Timer. If you disable this setting, the
FireRMS client will refresh at startup or when you click the Refresh Toolbar.
To turn off the Refresh timer:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the More Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, clear the Refresh Timer check box.
4. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the System
Administration dialog.
Setting up the System Inactivity Timer
You can choose to set up an inactivity timer which, when enabled, causes the local FireRMS
program to shut down automatically on an individual’s desktop after a certain time period of
inactivity. The Inactivity Timer option applies to users logging into FireRMS Clients and
FireRMS Mobile Clients. All FireRMS clients must be restarted in order to recognize the new
setting.
To set up the inactivity timer:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
5-4
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
3. In the Inactivity Logout (Min) field, enter the number of minutes that you want to set as
your inactivity threshold.
4. Save your changes and exit the screen.
When the number of minutes for inactivity is reached, a prompt displays on the local client
informing the user that the program has been inactive and will shut down. The user can cancel the
shutdown. If the user selects to cancel the shutdown, the timer is reset. If the user does not respond
to the prompt, the local FireRMS program automatically closes.
Note that if you are using Citrix networking, clients running FireRMS through a shared Citrix
network may not receive an automatic program shutdown prompt, or the system may not recognize
inactivity depending on how the Citrix client is set up.
Locking Completed Records and Creating
Supplemental Records
You can lock incidents and activity records in the Occupancy, Hydrant, Vehicles and Equipment
modules when they are completed.
To lock records:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. Go to More Settings and check any or all the four options available for locking records.
The specific fields are Lock Incident, Lock Activity (V&E), Lock Activty (Hyd) and
Lock Activity (Occ).
3. Save your changes and exit the screen.
If you need to add information to a report that is locked, you can create a supplemental record for it.
When an incident report is completed and locked, FireRMS displays a new button on the Incident
form. Clicking on this button allows you to create a supplemental incident report and only
authorized users can create supplemental records. The supplemental incident record has the same
number as the original incident. Supplemental Records are preceded with the phrase “SUPP” to
clarify the record type. When an authorized user opens a completed, locked incident, users see a
option box labeled Supp Inc in the incident form. Clicking on that box creates the supplemental
record.
Note that if you change the activity type in the supplemental activity report, the report is saved as a
new record, and not a supplemental record.
Locking Completed Records and Creating Supplemental Records
5-5
A user in a security group where this option is set to 3 – full access, is able create supplemental
incident reports. Users in security groups where this option is set to 1 – no access are not able to
create supplemental incident records.
Protecting the Daily Roster and Personnel
Module
You can limit a user's access to Personnel and Roster details using the Protect options on the
System Administration, Settings tab. If you limit access, a user can only view information at or
below their station level. For example, a user assigned to Station B could only access roster
assignments for Station B.
Note: You must enable Logins to use this option.
To limit a user’s access to Personnel and Roster details:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the More Settings tab.
3. In the More Settings tab, click the Protect Roster check box to protect the Daily Roster.
4. Click the Protect Personnel check box to protect the Personnel module.
5. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
You can use the Roster Access Lock to restrict access to the Roster Module to one user at a time.
Restricting access to the Roster helps avoid conflicts that could otherwise occur when multiple
users attempt to make updates to the same date at the same time.
When this option is enabled, each user must save their changes and exit the module before a second
user may access the module to make additional changes. If an user locks the roster and fails to
disconnect properly (if their machine or network access goes down unexpectedly while in the
Roster module), the lock may be cleared by running Reset Permissions in SQL Utils.
Setting the Date Format
You can select either the United States or Canadian date format.
To set the date format:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
5-6
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click the Set Date Format drop-down box to select the date format.
4. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
Selecting a Default Personnel Explorer
You can select a global default personnel explorer that displays when you click the personnel
explorer icon in FireRMS. The choices are:
Personnel - Select this option to view personnel based on department structure.
Roster - Select this option to view personnel based on Daily Roster assignments. This
option is only available if the Daily Roster has been created for the day.
Alphabetical - Select this option to view personnel in alphabetical order by last name.
If you make no selection, Personnel is the default.
To select a default personnel explorer:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click the Default View of Personnel Explorer drop-down box to select
the default explorer.
4. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes and close the dialog.
Selecting a Default Personnel Explorer
5-7
Activating Design Mode
You can change FireRMS from the default mode to Design Mode in order to modify the FireRMS
fields or field labels. While in Design Mode, you can do the following:
Edit
field labels or fields for all modules.
Modify field labels or hide them.
Hide fields, reposition them, or select the fields to display as Mandatory or Recommended
fields.
You can modify the following objects: text boxes, combo boxes, check boxes, and radio buttons.
After making all changes, deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box.
Note: You cannot change the labels on command buttons, and you cannot change fields
that are NFIRS and function required.
To enable design mode:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click Enabled under Dynamic property changes. System performance is
diminished when you enable this feature. You must enable this feature to view any prior
label changes. When this feature is disabled, default labels will display.
4. Select the Initiate Design Mode check box and click the Close Toolbar to change to design
mode. The words -------DESIGN MODE------- appear in the Title bar of the FireRMS
screen.
5-8
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
For information about changing field labels, see “Changing Field Labels or Visibility”
on page 4-61.
For information about changing fields, see “Selecting Mandatory and Recommended
Fields, Repositioning Fields, or Changing Visibility” on page 4-59.
5. After making all changes, deselect the Initiate Design Mode check box and close the
Settings tab.
Using an Alternate Spell Check Dictionary
Instead of using the default spell check dictionary, you have the option of using your own spell
check dictionary.
To use an alternate spell check dictionary:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click the button to the right of the Additional Spell Check Dictionary
field.
4. Select the location and name of the dictionary file you want to use. The file you select must
have the extension.CUD. You can place the dictionary on each client machine or you can
place it on a shared network, and map each client to this network drive.
5. Click the Close Toolbar when you are finished to save your changes.
Using an Alternate Spell Check Dictionary
5-9
Creating and Updating a Custom Dictionary
FireRMS version 4.4 and later allows you to create and maintain your own custom dictionary. The
option is now available on all operating systems and Microsoft network drives. The custom
dictionary can be shared with FireRMS mobile devices as well.
The spell-check dictionary is read-only on mobile devices.
To use and share the custom dictionary:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
The Custom Spell-check dictionary file is saved as filename ‘chcustom.cud’ and the default
location for the file is in the directory c:\winnt.
Use one of the following options to update the dictionary file:
From the Incident module, use the EMS & Incident Narrative tab to type the word.
You can see options for a correct spelling, and then cancel the spell-check, change the word,
ignore the word, or add the word to the custom dictionary.
If the custom dictionary does not exist and the administrator has not changed the default file
location for the custom dictionary, a new local copy of the custom dictionary file is created
on the hard drive of the local client machine when the user chooses to add a word to the
dictionary.
3. You can also use Notepad to add new words and definitions. Save the Notepad file and
retain the ‘.cud’ extension.
4. If the custom dictionary is located on a shared network drive, and the user running FireRMS
does not have modify privileges on that drive, the user cannot add new words to the
dictionary.
Sharing the dictionary with FireRMS Mobile
Users
To share the dictionary with FireRMS mobile users:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. Select the Mobile Preferences tab.
3. Press the button labeled “update root files on the mobile.”
The custom dictionary gets updated on the mobile systems, and the mobile user has to
restart the program to ensure that the FireRMS Mobile client reads all updated root files,
5-10
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
including the custom dictionary file.
The FireRMS Mobile users cannot add words to the custom dictionary.
Setting Local/Centralized Reporting
FireRMS reports can either be printed locally or centrally. The Central Reporting feature allows
maximum flexibility when choosing a reporting option because the reporting option chosen, Local,
Central Network, or Web, is stored in the Windows registry and can be unique for each Windows
user. For example, one Windows user on a client PC can set their reports to run locally, while
another Windows user can login to the same PC and select the central reporting option to run
reports.
Note: Central Web Reporting and Central Network Reporting are not available on Mobile
Clients. Mobile Clients can only utilize Local reporting.
FireRMS Administrators can choose one of the following reporting options: print reports locally,
print reports from a network path, or print reports through a network browser. The administrator
must follow the steps below to select which reporting option will be used by their department. Once
the administrator selects a reporting option, all department users must also choose this same
reporting option from their client.
Note: Users can always select the reporting option Local even if the Administrator does
not select this as the default. This is useful for users running mobile FireRMS who need to
print reports while disconnected from the network.
Note that FireRMS 4.8 or later, allows you to run Local Reports and replace the default reports by
clicking on the Print icon in several modules. The reports must be located in the designated reports
folder and may be pushed out to mobiles. After adding local module reports, the administrator must
reset Report Security for at least one security group to allow access to the reports.
The report naming convention is module_modulename.rpt and may include spaces in the name
such as module_incident report two.rpt. When multiple reports for a single module are available,
the user is presented with a list of reports from which he may select any one to run.
When a single custom report exist for any module, it is automatically used when the print icon is
selected.
The new local report option is available for the following modules:
module_incident
module_occupancies
module_VE
module_hydrants
module_otherentry
Setting Local/Centralized Reporting
5-11
Before you can use Central Web Reporting, you must install the Central Web Reporting software
located in the Add-On Apps section of the FireRMS installation CD. You also need a separate Web
server running IIS and you must create an ODBC connection to RMS5SQL_DSN on the Web
server. (IIS server is included with Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP.)
In order to use Central Network Reporting, each client PC must have access to the network drive/
folder where the reports reside.
Caution: If you are using the Central Network reporting option, you can delete the reports
from the Reports folder on your local drive but you must leave the empty Reports folder in
the Firerms5sql directory or errors may occur.
To select a reporting type:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System. In the System
Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
2. In the Settings tab, beneath Specify Reporting Solution: select Administrator next to
Who chooses reporting solution?
3. You have three choices:
Use
the default Local reporting solution
Use Central Network Depository
a) First, copy the Reports folder in C:\Firerms5sql to the network location on which
you want to create the reports.
b) Using Windows Explorer, map a drive to the Reports folder on this network.
5-12
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
c) Run FireRMS and on the Settings tab, click the Central Network Depository radio
button.
d) In the Path/URL text box, enter the path of the centralized server on which your
reports will be stored or click the Browse button to select the path. (For example, if
you mapped drive G: to the reports folder, you can enter G:\ or you can enter the
path \\Fireserver\Fire\Reports.)
e) Click the Check Path/URL button to verify the path is valid. (After saving your
settings, clicking the Reports button will display the Crystal reports located on the
network server.)
Use Central Web Reporting
a) In the Path/URL text box, use the following format to enter the URL of the Web
server on which your reports will be stored:
http://[machine name or IP address]/firereportscentral
where [machine name or IP address] specifies either the name of the machine on
which the reports will be stored or the IP address where the reports will be stored
For example:
http://FIRE-W2008/firereportscentral
http://10.101.17.39/firereportscentral
b) Click the Check Path/URL button to verify the reports display at the specified
URL. (After saving your settings, clicking the Reports button will display the
Crystal reports at the specified URL.)
Note: The reporting path the Administrator specifies for network or web reporting is
global. When each user selects the same reporting type, e.g. network or web, they should
not enter a path; the path entered by the administrator is used. If users enter a different path;
that path would then become the default for each user.
4. Click the Close Toolbar button when you are finished to save your changes.
Setting Central Reporting For Department Personnel
After you, as the Administrator, have selected a central reporting option, your personnel cannot use
this reporting option until it has been manually set on each client machine. If no reporting option is
selected on a client PC, the default of Local is utilized. You can choose the central reports option on
each client machine or each user can make this setting. You should be aware of the following:
Because
the report option used is stored in each user's Windows Preferences (registry), the
user must be logged into Windows when the reporting option is set so that it is saved in the
user’s registry. If Administrator’s use their own Windows logon on a client machine, the
setting will be saved in the Administrator’s registry.
Setting Local/Centralized Reporting
5-13
If
users will be choosing the reporting option, you must give them full access to the
Settings tab via the Menu,Tools,Administration, System security object.
From each client machine, on the Settings tab, select User next to the Who chooses
reporting solution? prompt, before choosing a central reporting option.
Displaying Mandatory and Recommended
Fields
In addition to the current red mandatory NFIRS fields, you can select your own Mandatory or
Recommended fields.
For Information on setting up or changing the list of recommended or mandatory fields, see
“Selecting Mandatory and Recommended Fields, Repositioning Fields, or Changing
Visibility” on page 4-59.
After you select the mandatory and recommended fields, you can display them in your records.
These fields display in new and existing records. If you selected a Start Date for Mandatory fields,
records created as of that date display the mandatory fields you selected.
To display mandatory or recommended fields:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab.
3. In the Settings tab, click Enable Recommended Fields, and/or the Enable Mandatory
Fields check box.
5-14
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
4. Click the Close button.
Sharing System-wide Messages and
Notifications Using FYI
On a system hosting multiple databases, the FYI Messages can be set up to send messages to
designated system administrators for each or all of the Databases available through the SQL server
system. Two new security options are available to support sending and receiving system messages.
To set up the system-wide messages using FYI feature:
1. You must first designate a central database to store and forward the messages.
Use SQL Utils to create a new empty FireRMS database and name the database so it can be
easily recognized by all local administrators, such as FYIMessages.
You do not need to license the new database or perform any other maintenance on it for use
as a central message database.
2. Use SQL Query Analyzer to run two scripts provided in the Text and Scripts folder which
exists in the FireRMS Program folder.
The
first script is named SetFYIPermissions.sql and should be run against the
FYIMessages Database.
The second script is named job_getsystemmessages.sql.When you open this script,
change the default database name provided in the script on line 6 to match the name you
gave your FYIMessages Database if necessary. After updating the name if necessary,
run the script.
When both scripts are run, permissions to write to the FYI Messages database are set
up and the job is registered with the local SQL Agent and runs every 5 minutes to
check/pass new system wide messages.
3. Go to the FireRMS System Settings tab>More Settings section and enable the option
Centralize Requests. When this option is enabled, a new dropdown choice box labeled
Central DB for FYI Messaging is enabled. Use this dropdown choice box to select the
database to use for Message Store & Forward.
4. Set this option on all Databases that are able to share messages. Each database must use the
same Central Database for message sharing.
5. The System Messages that are created are received/read through the Daybook FYI/Request
tab.
Sharing System-wide Messages and Notifications Using FYI
5-15
6. To enable system messages in your local database, enable the security options for the
groups of users who should be able to send or receive the messages.
When you have the right to create System Messages, a new level displays in the Daybook
List Filter when you click on the explorer to select to whom a new message should be sent.
“System Message” displays in the list just above the Department name. Any user in a
security group with rights to view System Messages will receive the message regardless of
their assignment within the Department.
7. You may choose to display a prompt message that will inform all authorized users that new
system messages are available.
To have the prompt display during logon, select the new option Startup Message on the
System Settings tab to cause the prompt to display when an authorized user logs into the
FireRMS system. The prompt provides an option to allow the user to go directly to the FYI/
Request tab where they can read the new Message.
8. You can also choose to have the prompt display during a FireRMS session so that users are
informed about the new message without needing to logoff and then back in to FireRMS.
9. To enable the timed prompt, use the FYI Timer spinner control on the system settings tab
to set the desired number of minutes for the prompt.
If
the timer is set to ‘1’, the message displays within 1 minute of receipt.
the timer is set to ‘2’, the prompt displays after 2 minutes and so on.
There are two new security options to support sending and receiving system messages.
If
System,
Receive System Messages: When this security option is set to 3 – Full Access,
users in the security group with this access are able to receive System Messages sent by
other users.
System, Send System Messages: When this security option is set to 3 – Full Access, users
in the security group with this access will be able to send System Messages to users in the
local database, or to any other database that subscribes to the Central Messaging System.
Using the EMS Module Filters for Incidents
To set a system to use Advanced EMS if you were using Basic EMS, click the button labeled Use
Advanced EMS on the System Settings tab and update the choice box on the System>More
Settings tab to select Advanced EMS.
To set a system to use NEMSIS if you were using Advanced EMS, click on the checkbox
NEMSIS V2, and create your demographics database and import your NEMSIS Codes (as
defined in the NEMSIS Admin Guide). Select NEMSIS V2 from the choice list after
restarting FireRMS.
5-16
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
To
set a system to use Basic EMS if you were using Advanced EMS, select Basic EMS
from the choice list located on the System>More Settings tab. Incidents previously entered
using Advanced EMS forms continue to display those forms. The new Incidents display the
Basic EMS forms.
To set a system to use Basic EMS or Advanced EMS if you were using NEMSIS forms,
clear the checkbox labeled NEMSIS V2 in the More Settings list. Restart FireRMS and
select Basic EMS from the choice list.
Note: You have the option of retaining or discarding your Demographics Database
connection when clearing the NEMSIS V2 checkbox. If you select Yes, clear the
connection, you must create a new demographics database or contact Customer Support
for assistance to restore the connection if you later decide to go back to using NEMSIS
forms. If you select No, don’t clear the connection, you can revert back to NEMSIS
without performing any extra steps.
Using the EMS Module Filters for Incidents
5-17
5-18
Chapter 5: Controlling User Settings
6
6
Chapter 6:
Changing System Settings
This chapter describes the tasks associated with changing or viewing system settings for your
FireRMS application.
Viewing System Information
You can view information about your installation of FireRMS that is useful to the ZOLL technical
support staff if you need to contact us regarding your software.
To view information about your FireRMS installation:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System. The System
Administration dialog displays.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the System Info tab and view the information
described in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1: System Info Tab Fields
Information
Description
License Level
The edition of the FireRMS client that you have installed. The two
license levels of FireRMS are Standard and Enterprise.
Executable Version
The version number of the client.
Database Type
The type of database to which the client is attached; SQL Server
or MSDE. MSDE is a run-time version of FireRMS that installs
locally as a service on the workstation and acts as a database
management system (DBMS) and FireRMS client all in one.
MSDE is designed for smaller user bases, performing best with
five or fewer concurrent users. MSDE does not allow the database
size to exceed 2 gigabytes (GB).
6-1
Table 6-1: System Info Tab Fields (Continued)
6-2
Information
Description
Database Version
The version of FireRMS database you are using. This is the script
number used to build/update the database. A reference table in the
database compares the database version to the client version.
These numbers may not necessarily match. This information can
also be accessed by clicking About on the Help menu, and
clicking the Details button.
System DSN
The name of the DSN (data source name) used to connect to the
FireRMS database. The DSN stores connection information for
the selected database. The DSN is created using the ODBC Data
Source Administrator in Windows Control Panel.
Server Name
The name of the server that FireRMS is logged onto.
Database Name
The name of the database to which FireRMS is connected.
SQL Script Version
The version of SQL script that you are using.
Error Log
The Error Log provides an error history for FireRMS. This
information helps technical support to troubleshoot FireRMS
issues.
View Error Log
When you click this button, you can view the Error Log. The Error
Log displays ten FireRMS errors at a time.
Clear Error Log
When you click this button, you can delete ten errors at a time
from the error log.
FireRMS License Keys
Current Level - The level of your software.
Current Expiration Date - The expiration date of your license key.
Key - The current product key.
Code - When you update the software, enter your code and click
Validate.
Supplies & Inventory
License Keys
Key - The current product key.
Code - When you update the software, enter your code and click
Validate.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 6-1: System Info Tab Fields (Continued)
Information
Description
Enable Automatic
Updates
Click this check box if you want users to be prompted to
automatically update their FireRMS client software after you have
updated the database using SQL Utilities. The prompt is displayed
the next time a user logs into the FireRMS client.
Click the Browse button and select the location of the client
software on the shared network drive. The path will display in the
Path to FireRMS upgrade text box.
Changing System Settings
You can view/change basic system settings on the Settings tab. For example, you can enable login
security, enable or disable dynamic properties, and choose your default personnel explorer.
To change basic system settings information:
1. Click the Tools menu, then select Administration, followed by System. The System
Administration dialog displays.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Settings tab and view the information
described in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2: Settings Info Tab Fields
Information
Description
Don’t Show Welcome Wizard at Startup
Disables the Welcome Wizard during Initial
Database setup.
Enable Login Security
Enables Login Security and requires users to
enter their username and password.
Disable Automatic Incident Numbers
Automatically increments Incident numbers as
each incident is created. Using this option
disables the automatic assignment of incident
numbers.
Enable LOSAP Tracking
Enables LOSAP tracking. For more
information, see Appendix A: “Tables of Field
Values.”.
Changing System Settings
6-3
Table 6-2: Settings Info Tab Fields (Continued)
6-4
Information
Description
Central DB for FYI Messaging
Allows selection of the database to be used for
shared FYI Messages on a multi-database
system.
Note: You must enable the shared message
option on the ‘More Settings’ tab for this field
to be available.
FYI Timer
Displays the number of minutes that may
elapse before users are prompted if they have
messages in their FYI message store.
Note: You must enable the shared message
option on the ‘More Settings’ tab for this field
to be available.
Additional Spell Check Dictionary
Enables you to specify your own spell check
dictionary. This dictionary is used when
you run spell check on your narratives.
Edit Config.fpw file
Contact ZOLL customer support for more
information on use of this option.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 6-2: Settings Info Tab Fields (Continued)
Information
Description
Specify Reporting Solution
Displays three options for Crystal Reports
from the FireRMS Reports module:
Local: Uses the default set of report
files installed with the FireRMS
program.
Central Network Repository:
Designates a central location from
which all users will run reports. This
option allows you to easily roll out
new custom reports for your users
while preventing users from running
default reports that may not be
approved for your department.
Central Web Reporting: A good
option for systems that use terminal
services or a Citrix environment, as
the web server will typically provide a
faster connection than a local or shared
network drive.
Set Date Format
Enables you to specify the format for dates:
ccyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/ccyy, or mm-dd-ccyy.
Inactivity Logout
Allows the selection of the number of minutes
of no activity before FireRMS will shut down.
Dynamic Property Changes
Enables you to view or make design changes
to FireRMS fields. Design Changes including
Tab Order, Local Help, Hiding Fields or Label
changes are enabled/disabled by enabling or
clearing this checkbox.
Changing System Settings
6-5
Table 6-2: Settings Info Tab Fields (Continued)
6-6
Information
Description
Enable Recommended or Mandatory Fields
Allows you to set fields as Recommended or
Mandatory when used together with design
mode. Clear the checkbox(es) to set fields
back to the default value (not recommended or
required).
NOTE: Recommended or Mandatory fields
are available in the Incident and Occupancy
modules only.
Default view of Personnel Explorer
Enables you to set the default view for the
Personnel Explorer:
Roster - Select this option to view
personnel based on Daily Roster
assignments. This option is only
available if the Daily Roster has been
created for the day.
Personnel - Select this option to view
personnel based on department
structure.
Alphabetical - Select this option to
view personnel in alphabetical order
by last name.
Collector Export – Collector Cut-off date
Enables you to use the Collector Cut off Date
field if you have the add-on program FireRMS
Collector. Setting a date for this field prevents
records earlier than the date entered from
being exported to the Collector database for
additional review.
Contact the ZOLL Sales
Team for more information on the Collector
Program.
Advanced EMS
When FireRMS is setup to use AdvEMS or
NEMSIS, this button is disabled. Clicking on
the button will update the system to use
AdvEMS. Do not enable this option if you are
using the ePCR to FireRMS Incident transfer.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Changing Additional System Settings
To view and change additional features and feature settings, go to the More Settings tab.
1. Click the Tools menu and select Administration and System. The System Administration
dialog displays.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the More Settings tab and view the information
described in Table 6-3. .
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Actions Sort by Code
Updates the Activity Lists to show and sort Activities by Code
value rather than the default Description value alpha sort.
Apparatus Narrative
Creates a Required Narrative Entry automatically for each
Apparatus added to an Incident Report. The narrative may be
completed by any authorized user.
Append SMS Narrative
Appends multiple CAD created narratives into a single Incident
Level narrative when used with SMS.
Ask prior file tran
Displays a prompt before initiating file transfer of attachments to
or from mobile computers. This allows you to defer those file
transfers is your network is currently busy with other activities.
Changing System Settings
6-7
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
6-8
Field
Description
Audit by Field
Used together with Design Mode to designate only selected fields
to be audited. See the SQL Utils guide for more information on
auditing.
Auto Neg Longitude
Sets the longitude value on the Incident Location tab to be
preceded by a negative value. Most locations in N. America are
located in a ‘negative’ longitude.
NOTE: NFIRS reporting is not affected by changing this value.
Calc EMS Patient Age
Sets the age of the patient by calculating the age based on the Date
of Birth entered on the Patient form.
Centralize Requests
Enables the sharing of messages between multiple FireRMS
databases when they are located on a single SQL Server.
See the section on ‘Shared System Messages’ for more
information.
Create Rosters
Enables the creating of multiple Rosters with a single Date
Selection. Enable this option and open the Roster Module and
select the Calendar icon. You will be able to create Rosters for a
month at a time or for an entire date range.
Disable Inc. Shift
Selecting this value will update the Incident module so that no
default shift is set when creating a new Incident.
EMS Adv expand vital
Enables additional fields for data entry on Vitals Assessments
when using the V2 version of the AdvEMS Flow Chart Form.
EMS Adv GCS by age
Enables age appropriate choices to be displayed to the user when
entering a Trauma assessment on the V2 version of the Adv EMS
Flow Chart Tab.
EMS for All Incs
Enables users to enter EMS data for any incident type, including
those where EMS data is not allowed by NFIRS. If EMS Data is
not supported by NFIRS for the incident type, the EMS data will
be stripped on export to NFIRS.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
Field
Description
EMS Mobile Unique ID
Ensures that a unique value is generated for all patient records
created on a mobile device. Do not disable this option without
direction from Customer Support.
Finding Sort by Desc
Updates the Occupancy Findings List to show and sort Findings
by Description rather than the default Numeric Code sort.
Note: Group order does not change as a result of this setting.
First Arriving Unit
Sets the checkbox automatically on the Incident Apparatus form
for the unit with the earliest arrival time on an Incident Report. If
more than one unit it set to have the exact same arrival time, the
checkbox is set for the first listed unit.
Inc Require Validate
Prevents marking an incident complete until the Validate routine
has been run successfully when used with the ‘My Fire Rules’
Validation product.
Lock Activity (Hyd)
Lock Activity (Occ)
Lock Activity (V&E)
Controls Lock Activity option, When enabled, completed activity
records cannot be updated. Supplemental activity records may be
created if a modification is required.
Lock Incident
Enables the Lock Incident option.
When enabled, incidents marked complete are set to read-only and
may no longer be updated. Users with access rights may create a
Supplemental Incident Records if required.
Lock PCR
Enables an alternative to using HIPAA encryption. When this
option is enabled, patient records may be assigned to a specific
person and no one but that person will be able to view the patient
record data unless they have overriding security rights to view the
data.
Multiple FDIDs
Enabling this setting will force users to select the appropriate
FDID value for each incident during data entry. FDID values are
added through the City Finder. For use on systems where multiple
agencies share a single FireRMS database.
Changing System Settings
6-9
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
6-10
Field
Description
NEMSIS V2
Enables or disables the View of NEMSIS forms. Replaces the
previous option ‘NEMSIS Start Date’. See the Using FireRMS
NEMSIS Administrator Guide for more information on this option.
Occupancy Search
Allows users from each database to view occupancy data from any
other database on systems where multiple FireRMS databases
reside on a single SQL Server.
Personnel Security
Enabling this option allows System Administrators to setup
multiple tiers of security. For more information on this option,
please see the section “Creating Personnel Security Settings”
elsewhere in this document.
Protect Daybook
Enabling this option restricts the default view of each user to
Incidents or Activities assigned to their Level in the Department
Structure or below when viewing the Daybook list of Incidents
and Activities.
Protect Desktop
Enabling this option restricts the default view of each user to
Incidents assigned to their Level in the Department Structure or
below when viewing the Incident module list.
Protect Personnel
Enabling this option limits the view of Personnel displayed in the
Personnel module to the current Users Department Level and
below.
Protect Roster
Enabling this option limits the view of Personnel displayed in the
Roster module to the current Users Department Level and below.
Push Desktop Att
Enables linking documents posted in the Documents module and
allows replication to the mobile when the administrator closes the
FireRMS client. Files and links posted in the Documents module
may also be pushed out to the Mobile clients by clicking the
“Update Desktop” button on the Mobile Preferences System
Administration form. This option works in conjunction with User
Preferences Administrative option “Push Mobile Attachments on
Close.”
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Push Desktop Doc
Enables sending Desktop Documents to the mobile on shut down
of the core client when the user preference ‘Push mobile
attachments on close’ is enabled.
Note: Users must have proper security rights for this option.
Push Incident Att
Enables sending Incident record Attachments to the mobile on
shut down of the core client when the user preference ‘Push
mobile attachments on close’ is enabled.
Note: Users must have proper security rights for this option.
Push Occupancy Att
Enables sending Occupancy record Attachments to the mobile on
shut down of the core client when the user preference ‘Push
mobile attachments on close’ is enabled.
Note: Users must have proper security rights for this option.
Push Personnel Att
Enables sending Personnel record Attachments to the mobile on
shut down of the core client when the user preference ‘Push
mobile attachments on close’ is enabled. Note: Users must have
proper security rights for this option.
Push V&E Att
Enables sending Vehicle and Equipment record Attachments to the
mobile on shut down of the core client when the user preference
‘Push mobile attachments on close’ is enabled. Note: Users must
have proper security rights for this option.
Refresh Timer
Calls the SQL Server to update FireRMS with changes from the
Database. By default, the timer runs every five (5) minutes.
The option may be disabled to reduce the volume of network
traffic, but updates or new Incidents created by CAD do not
display to users unless they manually refresh the Incident or
Daybook forms.
Roster Appr Only
Enabling this option assigns personnel to a station, but not to any
apparatus and will not be added to any incident automatically.
Changing System Settings
6-11
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
6-12
Field
Description
Roster Access Lock
Restricts access to the Roster Module to a single user at any given
time. Restricting access to the Roster can help avoid conflicts that
could otherwise occur when multiple users attempt to make
updates to the same date at the same time. If the user locks the
roster and fails to disconnect properly (if their machine or network
access goes down unexpectedly while in the Roster module), the
lock can be cleared by running Reset Permissions in SQL Utils.
Show Log Entry
Enabling this option updates Incidents, Training or Other Entries
through the Daybook. Users are prompted to enter Log Comments
after each update. Disabling this option removes that prompt.
SMS Date Overwrite
Disabling this option by clearing the checkbox prevents updating
of existing values in Incident date/time fields by any successive
CAD feed messages (whether initially created by a CAD message
or by a manual user update). If a date/time field does not have any
current value, then the date/time field is updated through the CAD
feed one time.
Startup Message
Enabling this option allows users to receive a prompt when they
logon to FireRMS if they have any system or other FYI Messages
waiting in their Inbox.
Synch Rank w/ Roster
By default, when a member of personnel is added to an Incident,
FireRMS will set the field “Position” to the selection as made in
the Personnel Module. This option allows you to override this
value with a temporary rank as setup and assigned in the Roster
module for the day of the Incident. Note: Using this option may
cause a slowdown during data entry in the Incident module.
Timed Message Notice
Enabling this option displays a prompt to users after a set interval
when they have new FYI or System Messages in their inbox.
ToDo Activity Start
Enabling this option sets the Start Date of any Activity record to
be displayed in the Start Time column on the To Do list form.
When disabled, the Scheduled Date displays in that module.
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table 6-3: Additional System Setting Field Descriptions
Field
Description
Use NT Login
Allows you to synchronize a users FireRMS logon with their local
computer username /logon.
EMS Module
Select the forms you wish to use for EMS reporting. The options
available are: Basic EMS, Advanced EMS or NEMSIS V2.
Max Logins
Enabling this option allows you to define a maximum number of
failed logon attempts that may be made by any user before that
user is locked out of the FireRMS system.
Lat/Long Decimal
Position
Allows the administrator to define the number of characters that
will be listed before the decimal point in either field. This can be
useful when latitude and longitude values are posted through a
CAD feed.
Replicate Incident
Disabling this option by clearing the checkbox prevents new
Incident reports from being replicated in FireRMS Mobile clients.
Roster Access Lock
Restricts access to the Roster Module to a single user at any given
time. Restricting access to the Roster can help avoid conflicts that
could otherwise occur when multiple users attempt to make
updates to the same date at the same time. If any user locks the
roster and fails to disconnect properly (if their machine or network
access goes down unexpectedly while in the Roster module), the
lock may be cleared by running Reset Permissions in SQL Utils.
SMS Date Overwrite
Disabling this option by clearing the checkbox prevents updating
of existing values in Incident date/time fields. This applies to
situations in which a message that was initially created by a CAD,
or by a manual user update, does not get updated again by any
successive CAD feed messages. If a date/time field does not have
any current value, then the date/time field will be updated through
the CAD feed one time.
Changing a User’s Login Information
You can change a user’s login name and password. For example, you may want to change a user’s
login name and password to match their NT login name and password.
To change a user’s login information:
Changing a User’s Login Information
6-13
1. In the Tools menu, click Administration, followed by Change Login.
2. Type the current login name in the Name field.
3. Type the current password in the Password field.
4. Click the OK button.
5. Type the new login name in the Name field.
6. Type the new password in the Password field.
7. Retype the password in the Confirm field.
8. Click the OK button.
Click the Close Toolbar button to save your changes and close the System Administration dialog.
box.
6-14
Chapter 6: Changing System Settings
7
7
Chapter 7:
Using FireRMS Mobile
FireRMS Mobile Setup Overview
Using the FireRMS Mobile module and a mobile device, Tablet PC or a laptop computer, users can
collect FireRMS data while away from the fire station. This includes data for all modules that users
have access rights to, for example, occupancies, incidents, or hydrants. Data that you enter on a
mobile device, such as a Tablet PC or laptop is merged with the FireRMS database when you
reconnect the mobile device to the network. If you are using a mobile device in a wireless network,
data is automatically merged with the FireRMS database when your mobile device is within range
of the wireless network, for example, your fire station.
Note: You can also merge your data with the FireRMS database while in the field using a
service provider with connectivity to your network via a wireless “hot spot” and a Virtual
Private Network (VPN). Contact your Administrator to verify you have this capability.
Note: Administrative settings cannot be entered on a Mobile device; these selections are
disabled. You must make Administrative changes on a FireRMS client that is connected to
your network.
After obtaining an agency supplied Mobile Tablet PC/laptop that is loaded with the appropriate
software, you can configure the mobile device using SQL Utilities. Complete the following steps to
enable users to collect data using a FireRMS Mobile device:
Step 1: Install mobile software on each mobile device.
For information, see “Security for Crystal Reports” on page 2-5.
Step 2: Connect each mobile device to your network.
Step 3: Using a FireRMS client connected to the network, set the security object
Mobile, New Incident to Full Access for each user who will be entering incidents on a
mobile device.
Refer to the Creating Security Groups and Defining Access Rights section of Chapter 3
for information about defining access to security objects.
Step 4: Using SQL Utilities, configure the mobile devices.
7-1
For information, refer to Chapter 6 in the SQL Utilities Guide.
Note: Database snapshots are loaded on each mobile device when you add the devices as
subscribers. If you previously added subscribers and the database has changed, you must
again add each mobile device as a subscriber. The most recent snapshot of the database is
loaded on each mobile device.
Step 5 (OPTIONAL): In the FireRMS application, create Disclosures to be Used by
Fire Personnel.
For information, see “Creating Advanced EMS Disclosures” on page 4-47.
Step 6: Using SQL Utilities, update the subscriber properties. This includes
updating each subscriber’s login, changing the time interval of the Merge Sync
Agent, and reviewing a sync history of actions. You can also run a bi-directional Ping
test.
For information, refer to Chapter 7 in the SQL Utilities Guide.
Note: You can optionally allow users to create new incidents or new occupancies while
they are away from the fire station. If you choose to do this, we recommend that you do not
also create new Incidents or Occupancies at the fire station. For information, see “Changing
a User’s Login Information” on page 6-13.
After collecting data on mobile devices disconnected from the network, a person designated by the
System Administrator can choose settings on the Reconcile tab to reconcile records entered on a
mobile device. (The Reconcile tab displays on a FireRMS client PC connected to the network. It
does not display on a mobile device.)
For information about using Reconcile, refer to Chapter 14 in the FireRMS User’s Guide.
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
These installation procedures describe how to install software on each FireRMS Mobile device. In
this scenario, mobile devices include tablet PCs or laptop computers.
Before installing this software, make sure you have a version of Microsoft SQL Express installed
on your mobile device that matches the version of SQL Server installed on the server hosting the
FireRMS database. If you use a non-matching version of SQL Server, the replication fails. After
installing the FireRMS mobile software on each Mobile device, you must set up each device as a
subscriber using SQL Utilities.
For information about setting up Mobile devices, see the FireRMS SQL Utilities Guide.
To install FireRMS Mobile:
1. Insert the FireRMS Mobile installation CD in the client CD drive. After a pause, the CD
options screen appears. (If the CD options screen does not start automatically, in Windows
7-2
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
User’s Guide
Explorer open the FireRMS Mobile installation CD directory and double-click
Launch.exe.)
2. Click the Install FireRMS Mobile button. The Welcome Wizard screen displays.
3. Click Next. The Customer Information screen displays.
4. Enter a User Name and Company and click Next. The Choose Destination Location screen
displays with a destination of C:\Firerms5sql\.
5. Click Next. A Setup Type screen displays.
6. Choose Complete or Custom and click Next. If you select Custom, you can deselect the
following: FireRMS Core Application, Crystal Reports 11 Runtime, or Replication
Configuration.
7. Click Next. The File Copy screen displays with your selections.
8. Click Next. The Setup Status screen displays. After completing the install, click Finish.
The install continues with Crystal Reports 11 Runtime. Note that the Welcome screen may
take a few minutes to display.
9. Click Next. The Customer Info screen displays.
10. Enter a User Name and Company and click Next. Crystal Reports 11 Runtime is installed.
11. After completing the install, click Finish. The main screen displays.
12. Click Exit twice to close the FireRMS Mobile install program and restart your mobile
client computer.
After installing the software on each mobile client, you must complete the mobile configuration on
the server. Refer to the SQL Utilities Guide for information on configuring the FireRMS DB
servers, databases, and utilities for the mobile clients for proper database synchronization.
Note: If an administrator uses design mode to create local configuration options, the
mobile users should run the SQLUtilsMobile program to reset permissions before running
the FireRMS Mobile again. This ensures all changes to the local version of the program are
set properly.
After installing the software on each mobile client, refer to the SQL Utilities Guide for information
on setting up servers, databases, and subscribers.
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
7-3
If you are using FireRMS 4.3 or later, note that you must drop all subscribers and the publication
process prior to upgrading to FireRMS 4.3. After the upgrade, you can enable the publication and
add the subscribers again. Your FireRMS Mobile license keys remains unaltered.
Setting Security on Mobile Devices
After installing FireRMS Mobile Client software, you must set the security on each mobile device
to enable users who are not OS Administrators, to enter data on the mobile devices:
1. Right click on the FireRMS5SQL folder.
2. Select Properties from the menu to display the Properties dialog.
3. Click the Security tab.
4. Select the “Group” Users.
5. In the Permissions for Administrators list box, select the Full Control check box and
click OK.
Database Synchronization for FireRMS
Mobile on Windows XP with a Firewall
After installing Windows XP (SP2) the firewall is turned on by default. You cannot synchronize
databases with the firewall turned on. You can either turn off the firewall, or set up your client PC
to run database synchronization with the firewall turned on.
To set up your PC, you must enable TCP/IP on Windows XP (SP2) for SQL Server 2000:
1. . Click Start, and then click Run.
2. Enter Firewall.cpl in the text box and click OK. The Windows Firewall dialog displays.
3. In the Windows Firewall dialog box, click the Exceptions tab and click Add a Program.
4. In the Add Program dialog box, you can select an instance of SQL Server or click the
Browse button to locate the instance of SQL Server that you want to add to the exception
list.
5. The default installation locations for SQL Server typically are:
Version\File Path
SQL Server 2000 Default Instance Program Files\Microsoft SQL
Server\Mssql\Binn\Sqlservr.exe
7-4
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
User’s Guide
SQL Server 2000 Named Instance Program Files\Microsoft SQL
Server\Mssql$instancename\Binn\Sqlservr.exe
Select the name of the instance (sqlservr.exe), and then click OK.
6. In the Windows Firewall dialog, under Programs and Services, select the check box next to
sqlservr.exe and click OK.
7. You can now merge and replicate data.
Enabling Mobile Filtering and File Transfer
You can synchronize mobile records for custom reports, local or custom program files for the
Personnel, Occupancies, Vehicles and Incidents modules. This feature also lets you enable or
disable the creation of occupancy records on mobile devices.
Starting with FireRMS 4.3 or later, mobile users can view and add attachments to the modules that
support attachments. Attachments sent or received with mobile devices are stored locally and in the
FireRMS database in an encrypted format.
Mobile Filtering and File Transfer Options
Starting with FireRMS 4.3 or later, several optional settings are available for Mobile configuration.
Use the fields available on the Mobile Preferences tab under Tools> Administration >System>
Mobile Preferences to manage these settings. The new fields support automatic synchronization of
updated custom reports, local or custom program files, and attachments for the modules Personnel,
Occupancies, Vehicles & Equipment & Incidents. An additional setting allows you to support or
prevent the creation of new Occupancy Records on the mobile device. The filter for incident
records is modified to default to a 7 day limit and a new filter to limit training records has been
added.
Note: You must use the new checkboxes on the Mobile Preferences tab to reset
permissions for mobile users if they should have the ability to create new incidents or
occupancies after the upgrade is complete.
.
Earlier releases did not allow mobile users to view or add attachments to the modules that support
attachments.Starting in version 4.3, an administrator can choose to allow the transfer of the
attachments to be viewed by mobile users as well as to support the addition of attachments by
mobile users that will then be added to the core database so they can be viewed and shared by all
users.
Note the following additional details”
 A network or OS path must be setup on the server to store attachments created on the
mobile device. Mobile device users are unable to add new attachments until this path has
been defined.
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
7-5
There
is a 200 character limit for the name of the attachment, and a combined file name +
path (as listed on the server) limit of 240 characters. This limit has always been in effect for
attachments created on core clients.
An optional setting under Tools>Administration>System>Settings>More Settings:
Clicking on this checkbox prevents file transfer of attachments from mobiles until approved
by the administrator.This option is intended to help ensure that file transfers do not slow
down the transference of other data such as new dispatches or other more time-relevant
data.
As new attachments are added from core clients, the administrator may choose when to
send them to the mobile clients by using the new buttons available under Mobile Settings. A
field next to each button displays the last date/time that attachments were sent to the mobile
clients.
Note that you can share attachments with mobile devices, and the attachment files created on the
mobiles are stored locally on the mobile and also in the FireRMS database as encrypted objects. It
can take several minutes for the encryption process to complete before the new attachments can be
viewed on the server or other mobile devices. Very large files or inherent network lag time can
cause additional delays in the File Transfer process.
Attachments viewed on the mobile device are stored in a default folder - attachments in the mobile
program directory. The following shows a sample screenshot:
Allowing Users to Create Incident or Occupancy Records
From a Mobile Device
You can allow users to create new Incident or Occupancy records from a Mobile device such as a
tablet or a laptop computer. You can also limit the number of incident records to be displayed on
mobile devices.
7-6
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
User’s Guide
To create new Incident or Occupancy records, or limit incident records displayed from a mobile
device:
1. In the Tools menu, click Administration, followed by System.
2. In the System Administration dialog, click the Mobile Preferences tab.
3. Click the following:
Allow
new incidents on the mobile device - Check this box to allow users to create
new Incident records from a mobile tablet
Allow new occupancy records on the mobile device - Click this check box to allow
users to create new Occupancy records from a mobile tablet.
Note: You should not allow users to create new incidents on a mobile device if you are
collecting Incident data via a CAD system. Duplicate incident numbers can be created and
when the mobile device is synchronized with the FireRMS server, incidents with duplicate
numbers will be merged into one incident.
4. Click the Close Toolbar button.
Options for Customizing FireRMS Mobile
Creating Individualized Signature Files for Inspection Reports
FireRMS allows you to create individualized signature titles for use in the FireRMS Mobile
Inspection Reports. Use Tools>Customize>Occupancies>Occupancies>Letter Templates to
access this option.This option includes adding specific names such as Inspector or Recipient.
You may also choose to add text that displays immediately above or below the signature set.
The following screenshot shows an example:
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
7-7
To create the new signature titles, highlight the line ―—signature in the Letter Templates list box,
and enter the new signature title in the main data entry field. In order for the signature file to be
recognized by Crystal Reports, each signature must be enclosed in bracket characters (such as
<Recipient> or <Inspector>.
Alternately, you can directly type the text into the textbox and add to the report by pressing the
‗insert button. A new line must be used for each new signature. You may also choose to add custom
text that will appear at the very top or very bottom of the complete inspection report by entering the
text in the fields labeled ―Header or ―Footer.
An example of the appearance of the signature and text might look during setup is shown below:
The recipient acknowledges receipt of the 2008 Property
Inspection Report with all the findings listed hereon.
<Recipient>
<Inspector>
Each signature entered in the data entry box is available for individual signing on the mobile unit
when the report is completed and displayed for signature entry.
Previous versions of the Mobile Inspection Report supported the signature of one person – the
recipient. By default and until or unless modified by the Administrator using the steps documented
here, the recipient signature continues to be the only title displayed on new inspection reports.
Additionally, administrators can create and add department specific sub reports to the default
Inspection Report. Using Crystal Reports, the administrator may choose to create and add new
department specific reports to the default FireRMS Mobile Inspection Report.
For each newly created signature sub-report, you must create a new report ―type and select the
checkbox labeled ‗Mobile Building Inspection Signature Sub-reports‘. You can define an unlimited
number of sub-reports & signatures to capture.
7-8
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
User’s Guide
Installing the Microsoft Tablet Ink SDK is required to use Mobile Inspection Reports on Windows
XP Pro operating systems:
The Microsoft Ink Software Development Kit (SDK) is provided on the FireRMS Mobile
CD-Rom. You must install this program on XP Pro systems using the mobile software in order to
use the new Inspection Form. The Ink SDK allows you to use the mouse or touch screen pointer as
an ―Ink device, supporting signature capture on the XP Pro operating system. You do not need to
install the Tablet Ink SDK if you are using XP Tablet or Windows 7 Operating Systems for your
mobiles.
Synchronizing with Physio-Control LIFEPAK Defibrillator
Use the EKG selection under AdvEMS added to Tools>Customize>Incidents>Tab Control to
synchronize with the Physio-Control LIFEPAK Defibrillator systems using BlueTooth connections
on your FireRMS Mobile clients.You must use this with a Physio-Control device and the additional
licensing from ZOLL.
Customizing the Mobile Dashboard
In FireRMS, the administrator may choose to add links to programs, URLs or custom Crystal
Reports. These processes may be grouped into a series of categories with as many URLs,
Commands or Reports added to each category as you like.
To setup custom mobile processes:
1. For the security group that should be able to setup Dashboard program options, set the new
security option "Menu, Tools, Customize, Mobile" to 3.
2. Click on Tools\Customize\Mobile\Dashboard.
3. Enter the category for each group of processes, then add the processes for that category.
In the example shown here, a Category named Maps is set up with two processes added as
URLs. The URLs may be added as HTTP:\\ addresses or WWW. addresses.
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
7-9
4. You may add up to five processes per category and an unlimited number of categories. Each
category acts as a group and displays on its own command line on the mobile as is shown in
the screenshot below:
Moving FireRMS Reports to Mobile for Dashboard
To add new reports for Dashboard users, you must first place the reports in the Reports folder on
the server and enable access for each group of users that should have access to them. The security
options for Reports are Allow Viewing, Allow Printing and Allow Exporting. Click on the
checkboxes next to reach report name to enable the options as desired.
After enabling security access to the reports, you must also copy them down to the mobile. You can
do this via the mobile options form on the server-based client:
1. Copy the reports to a directory on the server client machine or on a network share accessible
to the server.
2. Then go to: Tools, Administration, System, Mobile Preferences.
3. In the section titled File Management, enter the name and path for the directory where the
updates reports have been located. You can use the browse icon to ensure you have the path
setup properly. Once the path is set, click on the button labeled Update Crystal Report(s)
on mobiles. When you launch the mobile program the next time, the reports are copied into
its local FireRMS reports folder for use by the dashboard program.
7-10
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
User’s Guide
Note: To use the Crystal Reports that come pre-packaged with the Dashboard product, or
new ones you have created, remember to select an address in the Dashboard before running
the report so the data can be properly selected & displayed.
Installing the FireRMS Mobile Software
7-11
7-12
Chapter 7: Using FireRMS Mobile
A
A
Tables of Field Values
Appendix A:
This appendix contains tables listing all the security objects to which you can assign your group
levels of access. Each security object corresponds to menu items, forms or the desktop. You can
assign or restrict access on the Access Rights tab.
Access Rights Definitions
Table A-1 lists the security objects and describes the access rights that you can assign to your
personnel. You can set access levels for menus, forms, and the FireRMS desktop on the Access
Rights tab. This tab is displayed when you click the Tools menu, then select Administration,
followed by Security. You can choose from the following access levels:
1 - No Access prevents a user from viewing or modifying an object. The object is either
invisible or disabled.
2 - Limited Access allows a user to view but not modify an object. Limited Access is not
available for some of the objects.
3 - Full Access allows a user to view or modify an object.
Table A-1: Access Rights
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Delete,
Incidents
No access to Delete
button on Incident
module toolbar or to
Delete command on
File menu. If a user
selects this command
or a button, a message
displays: “You do not
have security rights to
delete this record!”
N/A
Full access to Delete
button on Incident
module toolbar and to
Delete command on
File menu in Incident
module.
A-1
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Delete,
Other Entries
No access to Delete
button on Other
Entries module toolbar
or to Delete command
on File menu in Other
Entries module. If a
user selects this
command or a button,
a message displays:
“You do not have
security rights to
delete this record!”
N/A
Full access to Delete
button on Other
Entries module toolbar
and to Delete
command on File
menu in Other Entries
module.
Desktop, Delete,
Training
No access to Delete
button on Training
module toolbar or to
Delete command on
File menu in Training
module. If a user
selects this command
or a button, a message
displays: “You do not
have security rights to
delete this record!”
N/A
Full access to Delete
button on Training
module toolbar and to
Delete command on
File menu in Training
module.
Desktop, New
Daybook
No access to Create
New Entry toolbar
button. The button is
dimmed to prevent a
user from creating a
new Daybook item,
e.g. Requests.
N/A
Full access to create
new Daybook
Requests.
(Note: If you set this
security object to Full
Access and you set the
corresponding menu
command’s object to
No Access, you will be
unable to create
Daybook items with
the toolbar button.)
A-2
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, New
Incident
No access to Create
New Entry toolbar
button. The button is
dimmed to prevent a
user from creating
incidents.
N/A
Full access to Create
New Entry toolbar
button.
Desktop, New
Training
No access to Create
New Entry toolbar
button. The button is
dimmed to prevent a
user from creating
new training sessions
or make changes to
training sessions.
N/A
Full access to schedule
new training sessions
or make changes to
training sessions.
(Note: If you set this
security object to Full
Access and you set the
corresponding menu
command’s object to
No Access, you will be
unable to create a new
training session with
the toolbar button.)
Desktop, New Other
Entry
No access to create a
new Other Entry. The
toolbar button is
dimmed to prevent a
user from creating
other entries.
N/A
Full access to create a
new Other Entry.
(Note: If you set this
security object to Full
Access and you set the
corresponding menu
command’s object to
No Access, you will be
unable to create a new
Other Entry with the
toolbar button.)
Access Rights Definitions
A-3
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Page,
Daybook
No access to Daybook
parent tab on FireRMS
desktop. The tab is
dimmed to prevent a
user from opening the
Daybook.
N/A
Full access to
Daybook parent tab on
FireRMS desktop.
Access to records
within Daybook is
based on access rights
set for Incidents,
Training, and Other
Entries.
Desktop, Page,
Daybook, Daily Check
This option does not
currently have a
matching function.
N/A
This option does not
currently have a
matching function.
Desktop, Page,
Incidents
No access to Incidents
parent tab on FireRMS
desktop. The tab is
dimmed to prevent a
user from opening the
Incidents module.
N/A
Full access to
Incidents parent tab on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting access (2 or
3) to any Form,
Company or Form,
Incident option.
Desktop, Page, Other
Entries
No access to Other
Entries parent tab on
FireRMS desktop. The
tab is dimmed to
prevent a user from
opening the Other
Entries module.
N/A
Full access to Other
Entries parent tab on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting access (2 or
3) to any Form, Other
Entries option.
Desktop, Page,
Reconcile
No access to the
Reconcile tab on
FireRMS desktop. The
tab is not displayed.
N/A
Full access to the
Reconcile tab on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting full access to
reconcile incidents
created on a Tablet
PC, using the
FireRMS Mobile
software.
A-4
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Page,
Training
No access to Training
parent tab on FireRMS
desktop. The tab is
dimmed to prevent a
user from opening the
Training module.
N/A
Full access to Training
parent tab on FireRMS
desktop. Select this
option if granting
limited or full access
to any Form or
Training option.
Desktop, Page,
Documents
No access to
Documents tab.
Users in the security
group are unable to
open, launch, add or
remove files from this
module.
Read-only Access to
the Documents tab.
Users in the security
group can open or
launch files, but
cannot add or remove
files.
Full access to
Documents tab allows
users in the security
group to add, update,
open or launch files
from this module. This
is the default setting.
Desktop, Toolbar,
Daily Roster
No access to Daily
Roster button on
FireRMS desktop. The
button is dimmed to
prevent a user from
opening the Daily
Roster. If you select
this option, you should
also select 1 for Menu,
Info, Daily Roster to
deny access to Daily
Roster from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to Daily
Roster button on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting limited or full
access to any Form, or
Daily Roster option.
Access Rights Definitions
A-5
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Toolbar,
Hydrants
No access to Hydrants
button on FireRMS
desktop. The button is
dimmed to prevent
users from opening the
Hydrants module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Menu, Info,
Hydrants to deny
access to Hydrants
module from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to
Hydrants button on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting limited or full
access to any Form, or
Hydrants option.
Desktop, Toolbar,
Occupancies
No access to
Occupancies button on
FireRMS desktop. The
button is dimmed to
prevent a user from
opening the
Occupancies module.
If you select this
option, you should
also select 1 for Menu,
Info, Occupancies to
deny access to
Occupancies from
Info menu.
N/A
Full access to
Occupancies button on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
providing limited or
full access to any
Form, Occupancies
option.
A-6
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Toolbar,
Personnel
No access to
Personnel button on
FireRMS desktop.
This button is dimmed
to prevent a user from
opening the Personnel
module. If you select
this option, you should
also select 1 for Menu,
Info, Personnel to
deny access to
Personnel from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to
Personnel button on
FireRMS desktop. If
you select 3 for this
option, but select 1 for
all Form, Personnel
options, a user will
still be able to access
Personnel List and
print Group and
Individual Personnel
reports.
Desktop, Toolbar,
Personnel, Lock
Personnel
Prevents the user from
accessing the Show
Locked Out option in
the Personnel Module.
N/A
Allows the User to
view and clear the
locked status of any
Personnel who have
been locked out of the
system.
Used in conjunction
with the Max Logins
option.
Desktop, Toolbar,
Reports
No access to Reports
button on FireRMS
desktop. The button is
dimmed to prevent a
user from opening the
Reports module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Menu, Info,
Reports to deny access
to Reports from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to Reports
button on FireRMS
desktop.
Access Rights Definitions
A-7
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Desktop, Toolbar,
Scheduling &
Tracking
No access to
Scheduling &
Tracking button on
FireRMS desktop. The
button is dimmed to
prevent a user from
opening the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Menu, Info,
Scheduling &
Tracking to deny
access to Scheduling
& Tracking from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to
Scheduling &
Tracking button on
FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting limited or full
access to any Form,
Scheduling &
Tracking option.
Desktop, Toolbar,
Vehicles & Equipment
No access to Vehicles
and Equipment button
on FireRMS desktop.
The button is dimmed
to prevent a user from
opening the Vehicles
& Equipment module.
If you select this
option, you should
also select 1 for Menu,
Info, Vehicles &
Equipment to deny
access to Vehicles &
Equipment from Info
menu.
N/A
Full access to Vehicles
and Equipment button
on FireRMS desktop.
Select this option if
granting limited or full
access to any Form,
Vehicles & Equipment
option.
A-8
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
Form, Company,
Completed
No access to any
“completed” (Select
“Complete” check box
in Incident Form's
Authorization tab)
company (modified
incident) report.
Full access (read/
write) to any
completed company
report.
Form, Company,
Incomplete
No access to any
incomplete (Do not
select “Complete”
check box in
Authorization tab of
incident report)
company (modified
incident) report. The
user cannot view
incomplete company
reports or create a new
company report.
Full access (read/
write) to any
incomplete company
report.
Form, Company,
Reviewed
No access to any
reviewed (Select
“Reviewed” check
box in Authorization
tab of incident report)
company (modified
incident) report.
Full access (read/
write) to any reviewed
company report.
Form, Credentials
No access to
Credentials Explorer.
The user cannot view
or select credentials
for training classes.
Read-only access to
Credentials Explorer.
The user can view and
select credentials for
training classes, but
cannot add, modify or
delete credentials in
Credentials Explorer.
3 - Full Access
Full access (read/
write) to Credentials
Explorer. The user can
view, select, add,
modify and delete
credentials.
Access Rights Definitions
A-9
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Credentials
Earned
No access to
Credentials Earned
Explorer from Info >
Personnel menu. The
command is active,
but if selected, a
message displays
indicating that a user
does not have access
rights.
Read-only access to
Credentials Earned
Explorer.
Full access (read/
write) to Credential
Earned Explorer.
Form, Daily Roster
No access to Daily
Roster for any day.
Read-only access to
Daily Roster for any
day, provided roster
has been already been
created. The user
cannot create or
modify the roster.
Full access (read/
write) to Daily Roster.
The user can preview,
create and modify the
roster for any day.
Form, Daily Roster, 24
Hours or Older
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 1, the user
has no access to any
Daily Roster.
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 2, the user
has read only access to
rosters within the last
24-hours.
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 3, the user
has full access to
rosters within the last
24-hours.
N/A
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 1, the user
has no access to any
roster.
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 2, the user
has read only access to
all rosters within the
last 24 hours.
If you set Form, Daily
Roster to 3, you have
full access to all
rosters.
Form, Daily Roster,
Create New
Prevents the user from
creating a new Roster.
N/A
Allows the user to
create a new Roster.
Note: this option is not
available on FireRMS
mobile units.
A-10
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Hydrants
No access to Hydrants
module.
Read-only access to
Hydrants module. The
user can view but not
modify hydrant
information. If you
select this option, you
may also want to
select 2 for Form,
Scheduling &
Tracking, Hydrants to
grant read-only access
to hydrants in
Scheduling &
Tracking module.
Full access (read/
write) to Hydrants
module.
Form, Incident, Add
Apparatus
Prevents the user from
adding new Apparatus
records to an Incident.
N/A
Allows the user to add
new Apparatus
records to an Incident.
Form, Incident,
Advanced EMS
No access to
Advanced EMS tab in
Incidents module. The
tab is dimmed to
prevent the user from
accessing it.
N/A
Access to Advanced
EMS tab in Incidents
module. The level of
access is determined
by the settings for
Form Incident
Incomplete, Form
Incident Completed,
Form Incident
Reviewed and the
completion/reviewed
state of the incident
report.
Form, Incident,
Advanced EMS,
Attach, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
on the AdvEMS Tab.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete attachments
from the AdvEMS
attachments tab.
Access Rights Definitions
A-11
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident,
AdvancedEMS, All
patient info
Prevents users from
viewing patient
information in an
Incident when the
Lock PCR option is
enabled.
N/A
Allows the user to
view patient
information in an
incident when the
Lock PCR option is
enabled, regardless of
the user to whom the
data is assigned.
Form, Incident,
Advanced EMS,
AutoNarrative
No access to the EMS
Auto Narrative button
on the EMS Narrative
tab. The button is
greyed; users must
manually enter
narrative text.
N/A
Access to the EMS
Auto Narrative button.
The automatic
narrative text entered
is based on
information entered in
the Advanced EMS
module.
Form, Incident, Arson
No access to Arson tab
in Incidents module.
The tab is dimmed to
prevent the user from
accessing it.
N/A
Access to Arson tab in
Incidents module. The
user can view and
modify information on
this tab. The level of
access is determined
by the settings for
Form Incident
Incomplete, Form
Incident Completed,
Form Incident
Reviewed and the
completion/reviewed
state of the incident
report.
Form, Incident, Arson,
Attachments
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
on the Incident Arson
Tab.
A-12
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
Allows the user to
delete attachments
from the Incident
Arson tab.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident, Arson,
Attachments, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
on the Incident Arson
Tab.
Form, Incident,
Authoriz, Member,
Personnel
No access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Member
Making Report section
of the Incident
Authorization tab. The
user cannot select who
will authorize the
Incident from the list
of personnel. Only the
Set to Current User
button can be used.
N/A
Access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Member
Making Report section
of the Incident
Authorization tab. The
user can select
personnel to authorize
the Incident.
Form, Incident,
Authoriz, Officer,
Personnel
No access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Officer in
Charge section of the
Incident Authorization
tab. The user cannot
select who will
authorize the Incident
from the list of
personnel. Only the
Set to Current User
button can be used.
N/A
Access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Officer in
Charge section of the
Incident Authorization
tab. The user can
select an officer to
authorize the Incident.
Allows the user to
delete attachments
from the Incident
Arson tab.
Access Rights Definitions
A-13
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident,
Authoriz, Reviewer,
Personnel
No access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Reviewer
section of the Incident
Authorization tab. The
user cannot select who
will authorize the
Incident from the list
of personnel. Only the
Set to Current User
button can be used.
N/A
Access to the
Personnel Explorer
button in the Reviewer
section of the Incident
Authorization tab. The
user can select a
reviewer to authorize
the Incident.
Form, Incident, Basic,
Attachments, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
on the Incident Basic
Attachments tab.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete attachments
from the Incident
Basic Attachment tab.
Form, Incident,
Casualties, Civ, Count
Prevents the user from
changing the Civilian
Casualty Count value
in the Ontario
Province version of
FireRMS.
N/A
Allows the user to
change the Civilian
Casualty Count value
in the Ontario
Province version of
FireRMS.
Form, Incident,
Casualties, Civilian
Prevents the user from
accessing the Civilian
Casualty tabs.
N/A
Allows the user to
access the Civilian
Casualty tabs.
Form, Incident,
Casualties, Fire
Service
Prevents the user from
accessing the Fire
Service Casualty tabs.
N/A
Allows the user to
access the Fire Service
Casualty tabs.
Form, Incident,
Casualties, FS, Count
Prevents the user from
changing the Fire
Service Casualty
Count value in the
Ontario Province
version of FireRMS.
N/A
Allows the user to
change the Fire
Service Casualty
Count value in the
Ontario Province
version of FireRMS.
A-14
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident, Fire,
Exposure Count
Prevents the user from
changing the Exposure
Count value in the
Ontario Province
version of FireRMS.
N/A
Allows the user to
change the Exposure
Count value in the
Ontario Province
version of FireRMS.
Form, Incident,
Completed
No access to any
completed (Select
“Complete” check box
in Authorization tab)
incident report.
Read-only access to
any completed
incident report.
Full access (read/
write) to any
completed incident
report. The user can
also review (select
“Reviewed” check
box) incident reports.
Form, Incident,
Incident Scroll
Buttons
No access to scroll
buttons in Incidents
module.
N/A
Full access to scroll
buttons in the
Incidents module.
Form, Incident,
Incomplete
No access to any
incomplete (Do not
select “Complete”
check box in
Authorization tab)
incident report.
Read-only access to
any incomplete
incident report. The
user can view but not
modify the report.
Users cannot create a
new incident report.
Full access (read/
write) to any
incomplete incident
report.
Form, Incident,
Narrative, Author
No access to edit the
Incident Narrative for
users who login and
are not the original
author of the
Narrative.
No access to change
the Author of any
narrative unless you
are the Author.
Access to edit the
Incident Narrative for
logged in users who
are not the original
author.
Form, Incident,
Narrative,
Auto-Narrative
No access to the Auto
button on the
Narrative tab that
inserts the auto
narrative. Narratives
must be manually
entered.
N/A
Access to the Auto
button on the
Narrative tab that
inserts the auto
narrative. Users can
insert the auto
narrative or insert the
auto narrative.
Access Rights Definitions
A-15
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident,
Number & Times
Read-only access to
incident times and
numbers on the
Incident Form.
N/A
Full access (read/
write) to incident
times and number on
Incident Form.
Form, Incident, PSAP
Time
Prevents unauthorized
access to the PSAP
Time Field.
Form, Incident, Older
Than 48 Hour
No access to incidents
older than 48 hours.
Form, Incident, Other
Than Your Narrative
No access to
narratives other than
your own, based on
login ID. Access to the
remainder of the
incident report is
determined by the
other Form Incident
Security settings.
Form, Incident,
Personnel, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting Personnel
records that exist on
an Incident.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete personnel
records that exist on
an Incident.
Form, Incident,
Personnel, Delete
No access to the
Delete button on the
Incident>Resources>P
ersonnel tab.
N/A
Access to the Delete
button on the
Incident>Resources>P
ersonnel tab.
A-16
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
Access to enter or
update the PSAP time
on an Incident.
Read only access to
incidents older than 48
hours.
Access to incidents 48
hours or older. The
level of access is
determined by the
settings for Form
Incident Incomplete,
Form Incident
Completed, Form
Incident Reviewed
and the completion/
reviewed state of the
incident report.
Full access to
narratives other than
your own. Access to
the remainder of the
incident report is
determined by the
other Form Incident
Security settings.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Incident, Print
No access to print for
incidents.
N/A
Full access to printing
incidents.
Form, Incident,
Reviewed
No access to any
reviewed (Select
“Reviewed” check
box in Authorization
tab) incident report.
Read-only access to
any reviewed incident
report. The user can
view but not modify a
report.
Full access (read/
write) to any reviewed
incident report. The
user can clear
(“de-select”)
Complete and
Reviewed check boxes
so that those with
security rights can
modify an incident
report.
Form, Incident,
Supplemental Reports
Prevents the user from
creating supplemental
reports when the Lock
Incident option is in
use.
N/A
Allows a user to create
supplemental reports
when the Lock
Incident option is in
use.
Form, Occupancies
No access to the
Occupancies module.
If you select this
option, you should
also select 1 for
Desktop, Toolbar,
Occupancies and
Menu, Info,
Occupancies to deny
access to desktop
button and menu
command used to
open Occupancies
module.
Read-only access to
the Occupancies
module. The user can
view occupancies but
cannot add or modify
occupancies or
schedule occupancy
inspections.
Full access (read/
write) to Occupancies
module.
Access Rights Definitions
A-17
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Other Entry,
Completed
No access to any
completed (Select
“Complete” check box
in Other Entry Form's
Authorization tab)
Other Entry event.
Read-only access to
any completed Other
Entry event.
Full access to any
completed Other Entry
event. The user can
also review (select
“Reviewed” check
box in Authorization
tab) Other Entry
events.
Form, Other Entry,
Incomplete
No access to any
incomplete (Do not
select “Complete”
check box in Other
Entry Form's
Authorization tab)
Other Entry event.
Read-only access to
any incomplete Other
Entry event.
Full access to any
incomplete Other
Entry event. The user
can create, modify and
delete entries. The
user can also complete
(Select “Complete”
check box) events.
Form, Other Entry,
LOSAP
Prevents a user from
accessing the LOSAP
points or type fields in
an Other Entry form.
Provides read-only
access to the LOSAP
points and type fields
in an Other Entry
form.
Allows the user to
access and/or modify
the LOSAP points and
type fields in an Other
Entry form.
Form, Other Entry,
Reviewed
No access to any
reviewed (Select
“Reviewed” check
box in Other Entry
Form's Authorization
tab) Other Entry event.
Read-only access to
any reviewed Other
Entry event.
Full access to any
reviewed Other Entry
event. Clear
(“uncheck”) Reviewed
and Completed check
boxes so that those
with security rights
can modify the Other
Entry event.
Form, Personnel,
Personal, View
exposures
No access to
Personnel>Personal>E
xposure notes which
contain information
about users exposed to
diseases or chemicals.
N/A
Full access to
Personnel>Personal>
Exposure notes.
A-18
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Personnel Info,
Basic, Security Group
Prevents the user from
changing the security
group setting for any
record in the
Personnel module.
N/A
Allows the user to
change the security
group setting in
personnel unless
overridden by other
security objects.
Form, Personnel Info,
All, Non-Restricted
No access to
non-restricted
personnel information
other than the user's
own (based on login
ID). If you select this
option, you may also
want to select 1 for
Desktop, Toolbar,
Personnel and Menu,
Info, Personnel to
deny access to the
Personnel List and
prevent the user from
printing Individual
and Group Personnel
reports.
Read-only access to
non-restricted
personnel information
other than the user's
own.
Full access (read/
write) to all
non-restricted
personnel information.
The user can add,
modify and delete
non-restricted
personnel records.
Access Rights Definitions
A-19
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Personnel Info,
All, Restricted
No access to restricted
personnel information
other than the user's
own (based on login
ID). If you select this
option, you may also
want to select 1 for
Desktop, Toolbar,
Personnel and Menu,
Info, Personnel to
deny access to
Personnel List and
prevent the user from
printing Individual
and Group Personnel
reports.
Read-only access to
restricted personnel
information, including
information such as
SSN and restricted
phone numbers, for all
records but the user's
own.
Full access (read/
write) to restricted
personnel information
for all records but the
user's own. Should be
reserved for
administrators and
staff designated to
maintain personnel
records.
Form, Personnel Info,
All, Scheduling
No access to the
Scheduling tab in the
Personnel module for
all records other than
the user's own (based
on login ID).
Read-only access to
the Scheduling tab in
the Personnel module
for all records other
than the user's own.
Full access (read/
write) to the
Scheduling tab in the
Personnel module for
all records other than
the user's own. The
user can add, delete
and modify scheduling
changes. Should be
reserved for those
making scheduling
changes in advance
such as changes to
future rosters, vacation
lists and future
personnel changes.
Form, Personnel Info,
Attachments, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
in the Personnel
module.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete attachments in
the Personnel module.
A-20
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Personnel Info,
You, Non-Restricted
No access to the user's
own non-restricted
personnel information
(based on login ID).
Read-only access to
the user's own
non-restricted
personnel info. The
user can view but not
modify their own
non-restricted
personnel info.
Full access (read/
write) to the user's
own non-restricted
personnel information.
The user can add,
delete and modify
non-restricted
information in their
own personnel record.
Form, Personnel Info,
Basic, Logon Info
Prevents additions or
updates to the Logon,
Password and Security
Group Sections of a
Personnel Record.
Not available.
Allows additions or
updates to the Logon,
Password and Security
Group Sections of a
Personnel Record.
Form, Personnel Info,
LOSAP
Prevents the user from
accessing the LOSAP
tab in the Personnel
module.
Provides read only
access to the LOSAP
tab in the Personnel
module.
Allows the user full
access to fields and
reports available on
the LOSAP tab in the
Personnel module.
Form, Personnel Info,
Basic, Demographic
Prevents users from
making unauthorized
changes to the
NEMSIS section of
the Personnel Basic
Info form. This
information is used to
automatically update
the Personnel
information in the
Demographics
database for systems
using NEMSIS
Reporting.
Does not apply to this
option.
Allows full access and
enables the user to
enter the information
in the NEMSIS
section of the
personnel form.
Access Rights Definitions
A-21
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Personnel Info,
You, Restricted
No access to the user's
own restricted
personnel information
(based on login ID).
Read-only access to
the user's own
restricted personnel
information. The user
can view but not
modify their own
information such as
SSN, evaluation
information and
restricted phone
numbers.
Full access (read/
write) to the user's
own restricted
personnel information.
The user can add,
delete and modify
restricted information
in their own personnel
record. Should be
reserved for
administrators and
staff designated to
maintain restricted
personnel information.
Form, Personnel Info,
You, Scheduling
No access to the user's
own information on
the Scheduling tab in
the Personnel module.
Read-only access to
the user's own
information on the
Scheduling tab in the
Personnel module.
The user can view but
not change their own
scheduling
information.
Full access (read/
write) to the user's
own information on
the Scheduling tab in
the Personnel module.
The user can change
their own scheduling
information. Should
be reserved for those
responsible for
making scheduling
changes in advance,
such as changes to
future rosters, vacation
changes and future
personnel changes.
A-22
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Credentials
No access to
Credentials
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Credentials node is
hidden in the
Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
Credentials
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking. The user can
view but not modify
Credentials in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Full access to
Credentials
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking. The user can
view and modify
Credentials in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Equipment
No access to
Equipment
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Equipment node is
hidden in Scheduling
& Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
the Equipment
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module.
Full access (read/
write) to Equipment
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module.
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Hydrants
No access to the
Hydrant information
in the Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Hydrant node is
hidden in the
Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
Hydrant information
in the Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view but not
modify hydrants in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Full access (read/
write) to Hydrant
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can modify the
hydrant information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking,
Occupancies
No access to the
Occupancy
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Occupancies node is
hidden in the
Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
Occupancy
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view but not
modify the Occupancy
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Full access (read/
write) to Occupancy
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view and
modify Occupancy
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Access Rights Definitions
A-23
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Personnel
No access to
Personnel information
in the Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Personnel node is
hidden in the
Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
Personnel information
in the Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view but not
modify Personnel
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking
Full access (read/
write) to Personnel
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view and
modify Personnel
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Training
No access to Training
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Training node is
hidden in the
Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
the Training
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view but not
modify Training
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Full access (read/
write) to Training
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view and
modify Training
information in
Scheduling &
Tracking.
Form, Scheduling &
Tracking, Vehicles
No access to Vehicle
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
Vehicle node is hidden
in the Scheduling &
Tracking tree view.
Read-only access to
Vehicle information in
the Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view but not
modify Vehicle entries
in Scheduling &
Tracking.
Full access (read/
write) to Vehicle
information in the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. The
user can view and
modify Vehicle entries
in Scheduling &
Tracking.
Form, Training, Any
User for Authorities
No access to
authorizing training
classes. The Explorer
buttons on the
Authorization tab are
dimmed to prevent
you from selecting a
name.
N/A
Full access to
authorize training
classes. The user can
click the Explorer
buttons and select a
name from the list of
personnel.
A-24
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Training
Classes
No access to Class
Explorer from the
Training module. The
user cannot open Class
Explorer to view or
select from the list of
classes.
Read-only access to
Class Explorer from
the Training module.
The user can select
classes but not add,
modify or delete
classes in the Class
Explorer.
Full access (read/
write) to list of classes
in Class Explorer from
the Training module.
The user can select,
add, modify and delete
classes in Class
Explorer.
Form, Training
Objectives/Skills
No access to Objective
Explorer from the
Training module. The
user cannot open
Objectives Explorer to
view or select from the
list of objectives and
skills.
Read-only access to
Objective Explorer
from the Training
module. The user can
select objectives and
skills but cannot add,
modify or delete
objectives and skills in
the Objectives
Explorer.
Full access (read/
write) to the Objective
Explorer from the
Training module. The
user can select, add,
modify and delete
objectives and skills in
the Objective
Explorer.
Form, Training,
Completed
No access to
completed (Select
“Complete” check box
on Training Form's
Authorization tab)
entries in the Training
module.
Read-only access to
completed entries in
the Training module.
The user can view but
not modify these
records.
Full access (read/
write) to completed
entries in Training
module. The user can
view and modify these
records. The user can
also review (select
“Reviewed” check
box on Training
Form's Authorization
tab) training entries.
Access Rights Definitions
A-25
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Training,
Incomplete
No access to
incomplete (Do not
select “Complete”
check box in Training
Form's Authorization
tab) entries in the
Training module. The
user cannot view these
records or create new
training sessions.
Read-only access to
incomplete entries in
the Training module.
The user can view but
not modify these
records. The user
cannot create a new
training session.
Full access (read/
write) to incomplete
entries in Training
module. The user can
view and modify these
records and create new
training sessions.
Form, Training,
LOSAP
Prevents a user from
accessing the LOSAP
points or type fields in
a Training form.
Provides read only
access to the LOSAP
points and type fields
in a Training form.
Allows the user full
access to the LOSAP
points and type fields
in a Training form.
Form, Training,
Participant
No access to the
Participants tab. The
access levels for the
remainder of the
training event form are
determined by the
settings for Form
Training Incomplete,
Form Training
Completed, Form
Training Reviewed,
and the completion/
reviewed state of the
training report.
N/A
Full access to the
Participants tab. The
access levels for the
remainder of the
training event form are
determined by the
settings for Form
Training Incomplete,
Form Training
Completed, Form
Training Reviewed,
and the completion/
reviewed state of the
training report.
A-26
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Training,
Preregistration
No access to the
Preregistration box.
N/A
Full access to the
Preregistration box.
Select this check box
to include
preregistration
information, which is
comprised of
minimum class size
and maximum class
size, in the default
class description.
Form, Training,
Reviewed
No access to any
reviewed (Select
“Reviewed” check
box in the
Authorization tab)
training session.
Read-only access to
any reviewed training
session. The user can
view but not modify
details.
Full access (read/
write) to any reviewed
training session. The
user can clear
(“de-select”) the
Complete and
Reviewed check box
so that those with
security rights can
modify session details.
Form, Training,
Reviewer
The user cannot select
a Reviewer/Instructor
on the Authorization
tab.
N/A
The user can select a
Reviewer/Instructor
on the Authorization
tab.
Access Rights Definitions
A-27
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Form, Vehicles &
Equipment
No access to the
Vehicles & Equipment
module. If selected,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Vehicles &
Equipment and Menu,
Info, Vehicles &
Equipment to deny
access to the desktop
button and the menu
command used to
access the Vehicles &
Equipment module.
Read-only access to
entries in the Vehicles
& Equipment module.
The user can view but
not modify entries.
Full access to entries
in the Vehicles &
Equipment module.
The user can add,
modify and delete
entries.
Hydrants, Activities,
Delete
Prevents a user from
deleting activities
from the Hydrants
module.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete activity records
from the Hydrants
module.
Hydrants, Activities,
Tab
Allows full access to
the Activities tab in
the Hydrants module.
Provides read only
access to the activities
tab in the Hydrants
module.
Allows Full access to
the Activity tab in the
Hydrant Module.
Hydrants, Schedules,
Tab
Prevents a user from
accessing the
Recurring Schedule
tab in the Hydrants
module.
Provides read-only
access to the recurring
schedule tab in the
Hydrants module.
Allows full access to
the recurring schedule
tab in the Hydrants
module.
Menu, Forms, New
Incident
No access to the New
Incident command on
the Forms menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from creating an
incident.
N/A
Full access to the New
Incident command on
the Forms menu. The
user can select the
command to create a
new incident.
A-28
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Forms, New
Other Entry
No access to create
new Other Entries.
The menu command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from creating a
new entry.
N/A
Full access to create
new Other Entries
Menu, Forms, New
Training
No access to create
new Training sessions.
The menu command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from creating
new sessions.
N/A
Full access to create
new Training sessions.
Menu, Help, Web
Support
No access to the Web
Support command on
the Help menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from linking to the
FireRMS Internet
support site.
N/A
Full access to the Web
Support command on
the Help menu. The
user can select the
command to link to
the FireRMS Internet
support site.
Menu, Info, Daily
Roster
No access to the Daily
Roster command on
the Info menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Daily Roster. If you
select this option, you
should also select 1 for
Desktop, Toolbar,
Daily Roster to deny
access to the desktop
button used to open
the Daily Roster.
N/A
Full access to the
Daily Roster
command on the Info
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Daily Roster.
Access Rights Definitions
A-29
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Info, Hydrants
No access to the
Hydrants command on
the Info menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Hydrants module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Hydrants to
deny access to the
desktop button used to
open the Hydrants
module.
N/A
Full access to the
Hydrants command on
the Info menu. The
user can select the
command to open the
Hydrants module.
Menu, Info,
Occupancies
No access to the
Occupancies
command on the Info
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Occupancies
module. If you select
this option, you should
also select 1 for
Desktop, Toolbar,
Occupancies to deny
access to the desktop
button used to open
the Occupancies
module.
N/A
Full access to the
Occupancies
command on the Info
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Occupancies
module.
A-30
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Info, Personnel
No access to the
Personnel command
on the Info menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Personnel module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Personnel to
deny access to the
desktop button used to
open the Personnel
module.
N/A
Full access to the
Personnel command
on the Info menu. The
user can select this
command to open the
Personnel module.
Menu, Info, Reports
No access to the
Reports command on
the Info menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Reports module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Reports to
deny access to the
desktop button used to
open the Reports
module.
N/A
Full access to the
Reports command on
the Info menu. The
user can select the
command to open the
Reports module.
Access Rights Definitions
A-31
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Info,
Scheduling &
Tracking
No access to the
Scheduling &
Tracking command on
the Info menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Scheduling &
Tracking module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Scheduling &
Tracking to deny
access to the desktop
button used to open
the Scheduling &
Tracking module.
N/A
Full access to the
Scheduling &
Tracking command on
the Info menu. The
user can select the
command to open the
Scheduling &
Tracking module.
Menu, Info, Vehicles
& Equipment
No access to the
Vehicles & Equipment
command on the Info
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Vehicles &
Equipment module. If
you select this option,
you should also select
1 for Desktop,
Toolbar, Vehicles &
Equipment to deny
access to the desktop
button used to open
the Vehicles &
Equipment module.
N/A
Full access to the
Vehicles & Equipment
command on the Info
menu. The user can
select the command to
open Vehicles &
Equipment module.
A-32
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools, Add,
Chemicals
Prevents the user from
modifying the
Security Exclusions
tab.
N/A
Allows a user to add
new Chemical codes
to the Chemical Code
list.
Menu, Tools, Admin,
Security, Exclusions
Prevents the user from
modifying the
Security Exclusions
tab.
N/A
Allows a user to
modify the Security
Exclusions tab.
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
Security
No access to the
Security command on
the Tools >
Administration menu.
The command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from opening the
Security dialog and
modifying security
rights.
N/A
Full access to Security
command on the Tools
> Administration
menu. The user can
open the Security
dialog and modify the
security rights. This
should be reserved for
system administrators.
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
Security, SecLev
Prevents a user from
modifying the security
level for any security
group.
N/A
Allows a user to
modify the security
level for any security
group.
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
System
No access to the
System command on
the Tools >
Administration menu.
The command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from opening the
System dialog and
modifying the system
settings.
N/A
Full access to the
System command on
the Tools >
Administration menu.
The user can open the
System dialog and
modify the system
settings. This should
be reserved for system
administrators.
Access Rights Definitions
A-33
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
System, Change
Encrypt
No access to the
Enable HIPPA
Encryption check box
on the Settings tab.
The box is dimmed to
prevents users from
encrypting current and
future patient data.
N/A
Full access to the
Enable HIPPA
Encryption check box
on the Settings tab.
Users can select this
check box to encrypt
the current and future
patient data. The
following data is
encrypted: name, date
of birth and social
security number.
Encrypted data
appears as asterisks.
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
System, View
Encrypted
No access to view
encrypted patient data.
Fields with encrypted
data (name, DOB,
SS#) display asterisks.
N/A
Full access to view
encrypted data. The
data displays on the
tabs and in reports
instead of asterisks.
Menu, Tools,
Administration,
Demographics
No access - user
cannot access
demographics form
used to set up
NEMSIS reporting.
N/A
Full access allows user
to update the
demographics form
available in
Tools>Administration
>Demographics for
NEMSIS reporting.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Advanced
EMS
No access to the menu
command Tools >
Customize >
Advanced EMS that
enables users to create
their own Flow Chart
protocols.
N/A
Full access to the
command Tools >
Customize >
Advanced EMS >
Protocols. Users can
design their own
protocols that appear
on the Advanced EMS
Flow Chart tab.
A-34
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Apparatus
No access to the
Apparatus command
on the Tools >
Customize menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Customize Apparatus
dialog and modifying
the apparatus setup
codes.
N/A
Full access to the
Apparatus command
on the Tools >
Customize menu. The
user can open the
Customize Apparatus
dialog and modify the
apparatus setup codes.
This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Cities
No access to the Cities
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
This command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from opening the
Customize Cities
dialog and modifying
the city entries.
N/A
Full access to the
Cities command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Customize
Cities dialog and
modify city entries.
This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes
No access to the
Codes command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Customize Codes
dialog and modifying
the FireRMS setup
codes.
N/A
Full access to the
Codes command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Customize
Codes dialog and
modify the setup
codes. This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
Access Rights Definitions
A-35
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes,
901 Codes
Prevents the user from
accessing the 901
codes form.
N/A
Allows a user to
access the 901 codes
form if Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes is
also set 3 – Full
Access.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes,
Dept Codes
Prevents a user from
accessing the
Department codes
form.
N/A
Allows a user full
access to the
Department codes
form if Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes is
also set 3 – Full
Access.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Codes,
EMS Codes
Prevents a user from
accessing the EMS
codes form.
N/A
Allows a user full
access to the EMS
codes form if Menu,
Tools, Customize,
Codes is also set 3 –
Full Access.
Menu, Tools,
Customize,
Department
No access to the
Department command
on the Tools >
Customize menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from opening the
Customize
Department dialog and
customizing
department
information.
N/A
Full access to the
Department command
on the Tools >
Customize menu. The
user can select the
command to open the
Customize
Department dialog and
customize department
information such as
the structure and shift
schedule. This should
be reserved for system
administrators.
A-36
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Hydrants
No access to the
Hydrants command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Customize
Hydrants dialog and
modifying the Hydrant
setup codes.
N/A
Full access to the
Hydrants command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Customize
Hydrants dialog and
modify the Hydrant
setup codes. This
should be reserved for
system administrators.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Incidents
No access to the
Incidents command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Customize
Incidents dialog and
modifying the Incident
setup codes.
N/A
Full access to the
Incidents command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Customize
Incidents dialog and
modify the incident
setup codes. This
should be reserved for
system administrators.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Incidents,
Customize
No access to the
Customize Incidents
menu item on the
Tools>Customize>Inc
idents menu. These
settings include
Incident Billing, Aid
Given Codes, and
Incident Defaults.
N/A
Access to the
Customize Incidents
menu item on the
Tools>Customize>Inc
idents menu.
Access Rights Definitions
A-37
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize, EMS
Trans
No access to the EMS
Translation Codes
command on the Tools
> Customize >
Incidents menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from mapping your
EMS codes to those of
another agency to
whom you submit
EMS data.
N/A
Full access to the EMS
Translation Codes
command on the Tools
> Customize >
Incidents menu. The
user can select the
command to map your
EMS codes to those of
another agency to
whom you submit
EMS data.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, LOSAP
Prevents the user from
accessing the LOSAP
setup form.
N/A
Allows a user full
access to the LOSAP
configuration form
available under Tools,
Customize, LOSAP.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Mobile
Prevents a user from
accessing the
Customize Mobile
form.
N/A
Allows full access to
the Customize Mobile
form.
Note: You must be
setup for mobile units
in order to access this
form.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Other
Entries
No access to the Other
Entries command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from
customizing the
information such as
setup codes.
N/A
Full access to the
Other Entries
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
The user can select the
command to open the
Customize Other
Entries dialog and
modify the setup
codes. This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
A-38
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize,
Occupancies
Occupancies
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
The command is
dimmed to prevent the
user from opening the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
and modifying the
Occupancy setup
codes.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Streets
No access to the
Streets command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from opening
the Customize Streets
dialog and modifying
the street entries.
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Full access to the
Occupancies
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
The user can select the
command to open the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
and modify the
Occupancy setup
codes. This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
N/A
Full access to the
Streets command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The user can
select the command to
open the Customize
Streets dialog and
modify the street
entries. This should be
reserved for system
administrators.
Access Rights Definitions
A-39
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Tab
Control
No access to the Tab
Control command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from
customizing Incident
and Advanced EMS
tabs.
N/A
Full access to the Tab
Control command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. Selecting this
command displays the
Tab Control box.
Users can customize
Incident or Advanced
EMS tabs. Users can
change tab captions,
select a different
version of some tabs,
make tabs invisible, or
change the order of
tabs.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Training
No access to the
Training command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. The command
is dimmed to prevent
the user from
accessing the Training
setup options.
N/A
Full access to the
Training command on
the Tools > Customize
menu. You can select
the command to
access the Training
setup options. This
should be reserved for
system administrators
and training officers
only.
Menu, Tools,
Customize, Vehicles &
Equipment
No access to the
Vehicles & Equipment
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
The command is
dimmed to prevent
you from accessing
the Vehicles and
Equipment setup
options.
N/A
Full access to the
Vehicles & Equipment
command on the Tools
> Customize menu.
The user can select the
command to access
the Vehicles and
Equipment setup
options. This should
be reserved for system
administrators.
A-40
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools, Delete,
Chemicals
Prevents a user from
deleting Chemicals
from the Chemical
Code list.
N/A
Allows a user to delete
Chemical codes from
the Chemical code list.
Menu, Tools, Export
No access to the
Export command on
the Tools menu. This
command is dimmed
to prevent you from
performing incident or
advanced EMS export.
N/A
Full access to the
Export command on
the Tools menu. The
user can select the
command to perform
incident or advanced
EMS export.
Menu, Tools, Import
No access to the
Import command on
the Tools menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent you from
importing files.
N/A
Full access to the
Import command on
the Tools menu. The
user can select the
command to import
files.
Menu, Tools, Incident
Query Builder
No access to the
Incident Query
Builder command on
the Tools menu. The
command is dimmed
to prevent the user
from using the
Incident Query
Builder.
N/A
Full access to the
Incident Query
Builder command on
the Tools menu. The
user can select the
command to create
incident queries and
send the results to a
Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet as a pivot
table.
Menu, Tools, Incident
Run Query
Prevents a user from
running a previously
created query.
N/A
Allows a user to run
previously created
queries.
Access Rights Definitions
A-41
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Menu, Tools, User
Pref, Admin, Push Att
Prevents a user from
accessing the User
Preference Option,
‘Push Attachments’
N/A
Push attachments to
the mobile when
closing out from the
local core client. Note:
this option must be
used in conjunction
with the new System
Settings for the
desired attachment
types.
Mobile Form, Incident
Number
Users cannot update
the Incident Number
when using a mobile
FireRMS client.
N/A
Users can update the
Incident Number
when using a mobile
FireRMS client.
NOTE: When this
security object is set to
3 and the security
object "Form,
Incident, Number and
Times" is set to 1 – No
Access, the mobile
users are able to
update the Incident
Number value (to
match an Incident
Number posted by
CAD, for example),
even though they are
prevented from
changing any Incident
date/time values that
would be posted by
the CAD.
A-42
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Mobile, New Incident
Prevents creation of
new incidents on a
Mobile Unit.
N/A
Allows creating new
Incidents on a mobile
unit when System
Settings Mobile
Preferences are set up
to allow this action.
Occupancy, Activities,
Actions
No access to the
Actions drop-down on
the Occupancies,
Activities tab. The
drop-down is dimmed
to prevent users from
assigning actions to an
occupancy.
Occupancy, Activities,
Findings
No access to the
Findings tab. Findings
are the list of findings
that may result from
an occupancy activity.
The Finding tab and
New Finding button
are dimmed to prevent
users from accessing
Findings. These
findings are added to
look-up tables
(drop-down lists,
Explorers) in the
Occupancies module.
N/A
Full access to the
Findings tab. Findings
are the list of findings
that may result from
an occupancy activity.
These findings are
added to look-up
tables (drop-down
lists, Explorers) in the
Occupancies module
and can be selected by
users who are entering
the results of
occupancy-related
activities.
Occupancy, Activities,
Delete
Prevents a user from
deleting activities in
the Occupancy
module.
N/A
Full access allows user
to delete activity
records.
Full access to the
Actions drop-down on
the Occupancies,
Activities tab. Users
can assign an action to
an occupancy.
Access Rights Definitions
A-43
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Occupancy, Activities,
Tab
No access to the
Occupancy, Activities
tab. Users cannot
assign actions to
occupancies or track
completion.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Activities tab.
Full access to the
Occupancy Activities
tab. Users can assign
actions to occupancies
and track them to
completion.
Occupancy,
Attachments, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
in the Occupancy
module.
N/A
Allows a user to delete
attachments from the
Occupancy module.
Occupancy,
Attachments, Tab
No access to the
Occupancy,
Attachments tab. The
tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
attaching files from
other programs to an
occupancy record.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Attachments tab.
Full access to the
Occupancy
Attachments tab.
Users can attach files
from other programs,
e.g., pictures, to an
occupancy record.
Occupancy, History,
Create
No access to the
Create History button
on the Occupancy List
tab. Users cannot
create a history of any
of the current
occupancies.
N/A
Full access to the
Create History button
on the Occupancy List
tab. Users can create a
history of the current
occupancy and enter
new occupancy data.
Occupancy, Letters,
Delete Inspection
Report
Prevents the user from
deleting inspection
reports created by
mobile users and
saved to the
Occupancy Letters
tab.
N/A
Allows a user to delete
inspection reports
created by mobile
users from the
Occupancy letters tab.
A-44
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Occupancy, Letters,
Tab
No access to
Occupancy, Letters
tab. The tab is dimmed
to prevent users from
creating letters for
occupancies.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Letters
tab.
Full access to the
Occupancy, Letters
tab. Users can create
letters pertaining to
the occupancy. For
example, an
introductory letter to
be sent to a new
occupancy, describing
an upcoming
inspection.
Occupancy, List,
Delete
No access to the
Delete button on the
List tab. The Delete
button is dimmed to
prevent users from
deleting occupancies.
N/A
Full access to the
Delete button on the
List tab. Users can
delete occupancies
from the list.
Occupancy, List,
History
No access to the
History radio button
on the List tab. The
History radio button is
dimmed to prevent
users from reviewing
history records
associated with an
occupancy.
N/A
Full access to the
History radio button
on the List tab. Users
can review history
records associated
with an occupancy.
Occupancy, List, New
No access to the New
button on the List tab.
The New button is
dimmed to prevent
users from creating
occupancies.
N/A
Full access to the New
button on the List tab.
Users can create new
occupancies.
Access Rights Definitions
A-45
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Basic
No access to the Basic
Data tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
The Basic Data tab is
dimmed to prevent
users from viewing/
changing the data.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Basic Data tab.
Full access to the
Basic Data tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Build
No access to the
Building tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
The Building tab is
dimmed to prevent
users from viewing/
changing the data.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Building Tab.
Full access to the
Building tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Contacts
No access to the
Contacts tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
The Contacts tab is
dimmed to prevent
users from viewing/
changing the contact
persons for the
occupancy.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Contacts Tab.
Full access to the
Contacts tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Hydrants
No access to the
Hydrants tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
The Hydrants tab is
dimmed to prevent
users from viewing/
changing the data.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Hydrants Tab.
Full access to the
Hydrants tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
A-46
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Load
No access to the Occ
Load tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
This tab indicates the
number of people that
the occupancy can
accommodate. The
Occ Load tab is
dimmed to prevent
use.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Load Tab.
Full access to the Occ
Load tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, OccInfo,
MBuild
No access to the More
Building tab on the
Occupancy Info tab.
The More Building tab
is dimmed to prevent
users from viewing/
changing the data.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
More Building Tab.
Full access to the
More Building tab on
the Occupancy Info
tab. Users can change
the data on this tab.
Occupancy, OccInfo,
Tab
No access to the
Occupancy Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
occupancy
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy Info
Tab and sub-tabs.
Full access to the
Occupancy Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab, unless
access is restricted on
the sub-tabs.
Occupancy, PrevInfo,
HazMat
No access to the
HazMat tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the HazMat
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Prevention Info
HazMat Tab.
Full access to the
HazMat tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Access Rights Definitions
A-47
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Occupancy, PrevInfo,
Loc
No access to the
Locations & Other
Info tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Prevention Info
Locations Tab.
Full access to the
Locations tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, PrevInfo,
Permits
No access to the
Permits tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Prevention Info
Permits Tab.
Full access to the
Permits tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, PrevInfo,
Systems
No access to the
Systems tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Prevention Info
Systems Tab.
Full access to the
Systems tab on the
Prevention Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy, PrevInfo,
Tab
No access to the
Prevention Info tab.
This tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Prevention Info Tab
and sub-tabs.
Full access to the
Prevention Info tab.
Users can change the
data on this tab.
Occupancy,
Schedules, Tab
No access to the
Schedules tab. This
tab is dimmed to
prevent users from
changing the
information.
Read Only access to
the Occupancy
Recurring Schedule
Tab.
Full access to the
Schedules tab. Users
can change the data on
this tab.
A-48
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Reports, Occupancies
No access to the
Occupancy Reports.
Users cannot create or
print any Occupancy
reports.
N/A
Full access to the
Occupancy Reports.
Users can create and
print reports.
System, Receive
System Messages
Prevents the user from
receiving FYI or other
messages sent through
the System Messaging
option.
N/A
Allows the user to
receive and view FYI
or other messages sent
through the System
Messaging Option.
System, Send System
Messages
Prevents the user from
sending FYI or other
messages through the
System Messaging
option.
N/A
Allows the user to
send FYI or other
messages to the
System Message list.
Note, the option
Centralize Requests
must be enabled to
send system messages.
Vehicles and
Equipment, Activities,
Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting activities in
the Vehicles and
Equipment module.
N/A
Allows a user to delete
activities from the
Vehicles and
Equipment module.
Vehicles and
Equipment, Activities,
Tab
Prevents a user from
accessing the
Activities tab in the
Vehicles and
Equipment module.
Provides read-only
access to the activities
tab in the Vehicles and
Equipment module.
Provides full access to
the Activities tab in
the Vehicles and
Equipment module.
Vehicles and
Equipment,
Attachments, Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting attachments
in the Vehicles and
Equipment module.
N/A
Allows a user to delete
attachments from the
Vehicles and
Equipment module.
Access Rights Definitions
A-49
Table A-1: Access Rights (Continued)
Object
1 - No Access
2 - Limited Access
3 - Full Access
Vehicles and
Equipment, List,
Delete
Prevents the user from
deleting existing
Vehicle or Equipment
records from the List
form in that module.
N/A
Allows the user to
delete Vehicle or
Equipment records
from the List form in
that module.
Vehicles and
Equipment, Schedule,
Tab
Prevents a user from
accessing the
Recurring Schedule
tab in the Vehicle and
Equipment module.
Provides read-only
access to the
Recurring Schedule
tab in the Vehicle and
Equipment module.
Allows a user full
access to the
Recurring Schedule
tab in the Vehicle and
Equipment module.
Form, Incident, Delete
Apparatus
No access to delete
apparatus from an
Incident.
N/A
Full access to delete
apparatus from an
Incident.
User defined tab
access rights
If one or more User
Defined Tabs exist,
setting the security
object for that tab to 1
will prevent users in
that security group
from accessing the tab.
Read Only access to
the specified User
Defined Tab.
Full access to the User
defined tab.
A-50
Appendix A: Tables of Field Values
B
B
Appendix B:
Example Department Structures
The diagrams in this Appendix guide you in defining your department structure in FireRMS. The
relationships among Division, Battalion and Station depict associations among operational levels
within your department. In many agencies, personnel are assigned to either a station or a specific
apparatus or unit. This unit is then assigned to a station. The station can then be assigned to a
battalion and each battalion to a division.
Large Agency
The department structure in the following example depicts a large agency. Division 1 contains two
battalions. Each battalion has four stations. Each station has 1 to 3 apparatus. Each apparatus has
from 1 to 4 personnel assigned to it. The numbered divisions are emergency response divisions.
The named divisions, Training and Prevention, provide functional support.
B-1
B-2
Appendix B: Example Department Structures
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Moderate Agency
The following structure depicts a moderate-sized agency. Divisions separate functional groups
within the department. Battalions are assigned to a single division.
B-3
Small Agency
The following structure depicts a small agency. Smaller agencies may create a single division
named Department and associate the stations and apparatus assignments with that single division,
opting not to use battalions at all.
B-4
Appendix B: Example Department Structures
C
C
Appendix C:
Customizing Field Codes
The dialog boxes in FireRMS contain fields that include list boxes, drop-down list boxes, explorers,
and finders. The values or “codes” that appear in these fields are associated with the category
assigned to that list. You can modify the lists of codes in the dialog boxes by adding to or removing
codes from the category. This is referred to as “code setup.”
The following Code types are available in FireRMS:
Department
Codes - User-definable codes that do not adhere to NFIRS restrictions.
Department codes can be used to define a broad range of department information such
as Apparatus, Employee Status, Safety Equipment, and Vehicle Type.
901 Codes - Predefined NFIRS codes used for incident reporting, e.g., Aid Given or
Received, and Cause of Injury.
Chemical Codes - Predefined codes that users can reference when entering Hazmat
information. Users cannot modify these codes.
EMS Codes - Predefined set of codes for EMS incident reporting, e.g., Injury Type,
and Medical History.
This appendix displays the dialog boxes with the fields you can modify. A table is displayed
following each dialog box that contains:
The
names of the fields you can customize
dialog box/tab on which you can change codes in the Category
The name of the category with which the field is associated
A reference to the procedure you can follow to change the codes in the list
After modifying the codes for any of the lists, you must always close and restart FireRMS in order
for the changes to take effect.
The
C-1
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize
Menu Commands
This section displays the dialog boxes with the fields you can customize for the FireRMS
Customize commands.
Apparatus
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Apparatus, the Basic Info tab
displays.
Table C-1: Apparatus Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Type
C-2
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus or
Resource Type
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-1: Apparatus Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Assigned To
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Division
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Agency
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other Agencies
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Cities
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Cities, the Cities tab displays.
You can view the fields in Table C-2 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-3
Table C-2: City Field
Customizable
Field
State/Province
C-4
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus or
Resource Type
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
City Numbers
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Cities, you can click the
Numbers tab to customize the numbers you want to associate with a city. You can view the fields in
Table C-3 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-3: City Number Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
County
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Counties
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Agency
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other Agencies
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-5
Streets
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Cities, you can click the
Streets tab to customize your streets. You can view the fields in Table C-4 in which you can modify
the codes.
Table C-4: City and Street Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-6
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
City
Customize Cities
dialog box
City
For information, see
“Entering Cities” on
page 3-25.
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Street Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-4: City and Street Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Customizable
Field
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Billing
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, and Incidents, followed by Customize
Incidents, you can click the Incident Billing tab to set billing rates to be used by your agency's
resources in response to incidents. You can view the fields in Table C-5 in which you can modify
the codes.
C t
i
I id t /I id t Billi
Table C-5: Incident Billing Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Item (for Code Type
Apparatus)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus or
Resource Type
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-7
Table C-5: Incident Billing Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Item (for Code Type
Personnel)
C-8
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Positions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Aid Given Codes
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, and Incidents, followed by Customize
Incidents, you can click the Aid Given Codes tab to select forms for Aid Given Codes to be
completed in the Advanced EMS section of incident reports.
You can customize different fields on this dialog box, depending on what you select from the Type
drop-down list box. You can view the fields in Table C-6 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-6: Incident Aid Given Codes Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
Aid Given
Medical Actions
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Delivery
Presentations
Complications
Gender
Presentation
Complications
Delivery Gender
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
EKG
Rhythm
Ectopy
Cardiac Rhythm
Ectopy
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-9
Table C-6: Incident Aid Given Codes Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
IV
Solution
Rate
IV Solutions
IV Rate
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Medication
Type
Route
Medication Types
Medication Route
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Oxygen
Route
Oxygen Route
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Physical
Location
Temperature
Location
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Vitals
Skin
Pupil Left
Pupil Right
Position
Vital Signs Skin
Pupils
Pupils
Vital Signs Position
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Customizable
Field
C-10
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Training
Using the Training module, you can create a list of training credentials, create objectives and skills,
or create or modify training classes.
Training Credentials
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, and Training, followed by Credentials, and
the Requirements tab, you can create a list of credentials related to your training classes.
Credentials are used to measure a person's progress towards a particular goal, such as a
certification. You can view the fields in Table C-7 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-7: Training Credential Customizable Fields
Tab
Type
Customizable
Field
Identification
901 Codes
EMS Codes
Actions Taken
Aid Given
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
Actions Taken
Medical Actions
For information,
see
“Customizing
Codes” on page
3-10.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-11
Table C-7: Training Credential Customizable Fields (Continued)
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
Tab
Type
Customizable
Field
Initial
(Category/
Class)
Class Explorer
Default Results
Class Explorer
Default Results
Class Explorer
Default Results
with a minimum
__
with a “Y” for
__
Accumulate__w
ithin
N/A
N/A
N/A
For information,
see “Setting Up
the Class
Explorer Default
Results.”
Initial
(Objective/Skill)
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
with a minimum
__
with a “Y” for
__
Accumulate__w
ithin
N/A
N/A
N/A
For information,
see “Setting Up
the Objective
Explorer Default
Results.”
Training Objectives/Skills
After selecting the Tools menu, then Customize, and Training, followed by Objectives/Skills, you
can click the Data Entry tab and then the Results tab to define the firefighter's role in the agency
and to demonstrate an ability, such as properly placing a ground ladder. You can view the fields in
Table C-8 in which you can modify the codes.
C-12
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-8: Training Objective/Skills Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Objective Explorer
Default tab of the
Customize Training
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Setting Up the
Objective Explorer
Default Results” on
page 4-45.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-13
Training Classes
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, and Training, followed by Classes, you can
customize different fields on this dialog box, depending on the tabs you select. You can view the
fields in Table C-9 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-9: Training Class Customizable Fields
C-14
Tab
Type
Defaults
Structure
Department
Codes
Department
Codes
Department
Codes
Results
Class Explorer
Default Results
Class Explorer
Default Results
Class Explorer
Default Results
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
Station
Other
Method
Providers
N/A
Other Training
Locations
Training
Methods
Training
Providers
For information,
see “Entering
Department
Codes” on page
3-10.
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
For information,
see “Setting Up
the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on
page 4-44.
Customizable
Field
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-9: Training Class Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab
Type
Objective/Skills
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
Objective
Explorer Default
Results
Customizable
Field
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
Default Result 1
Default Result 2
Default Result 3
For information,
see “Setting Up
the Objective
Explorer Default
Results” on
page 4-45.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-15
Occupancies
After selecting Occupancies on the Customize menu, you can click the Findings tab to create a list
of findings that may result from an occupancy activity. The fields you can customize depend on the
tab you select. You can view the fields in Table C-10 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-10: Occupancy Findings Customizable Fields
C-16
Tab
Type
Customizable
Field
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
Findings/
Standards
Standards
Standard
N/A
For information,
see “Creating a
List of
Occupancy
Findings” on
page 4-8.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-10: Occupancy Findings Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab
Type
Customizable
Field
Assignments
Customize
Department,
Structure tab
Location
Apparatus
Shift
Customize
Apparatus,
Basic Info tab
Customize
Department,
Shifts tab
Category You
Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The
Codes
N/A
N/A
N/A
For information,
see “Entering
Basic
Department
Information” on
page 3-1.
For information,
see “Adding
Apparatus and
Staffing
Apparatus” on
page 3-18.
For information,
see “Entering
Department
Shift Patterns”
on page 3-6.
Hydrants
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Hydrants, you can click the
Assignments tab to identify staff available you can assign to hydrant activities. You can view the
fields in Table C-11 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-17
C
i
H d
A i
Table C-11: Hydrant Assignment Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-18
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus
Default Result text
boxes
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Shift
Default Result text
boxes
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Name
Personnel
Information List tab
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Personnel”
on page 3-21.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Vehicles and Equipment
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Vehicles Equipment &
Locations, you can click the Assignments tab to create a list of staff and positions available for
assignment to actions in the Vehicles & Equipment module. You can view the fields in Table C-12
in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-19
Locations
Table C-12: V&E Assignment Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus
Default Result text
boxes
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Shift
Default Result text
boxes
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Person
Personnel
Information List tab
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Personnel”
on page 3-21.
Tab Creator
When you click the Tools menu, then select Customize, followed by Tab Creator, you can create
your own customized tabs containing labels, text boxes, combo boxes, check boxes, date/time
fields, or reports. You can define the items you can choose from the combo boxes. You can view the
fields in Table C-13 in which you can modify the codes.
C-20
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-13: Tab Creator Custom table
Customizable
Field
Combo Box
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
<ADD NEW>
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands
C-21
Customizing Fields for Incident,
Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
This section describes the fields you can modify on the forms associated with the four main
FireRMS tabs. These tabs include: Incidents, Training, Other Entries, and Daybook.
Incidents Form
This section describes the fields on the Incident form that you can customize.
Response Time
When you click the Basic tab, followed by the Response tab, you can view the fields in Table C-14
in which you can modify the codes. On the Response tab, you can set a response time threshold for
incident response. When the first unit arrival time exceeds the response time threshold, the
response Time label on the Incident Form's Response sub-tab is displayed in Red.
C-22
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-14: Incidents Response Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Incident Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Station
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Shift
Shifts tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Mutual Aid
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aid Given or
Received
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Actions Taken
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Actions Taken
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Detector
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Alerted
Occupants
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-23
Table C-14: Incidents Response Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Hazardous Materials
Released
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Hazardous Materials
Released
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Incident Delay
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Incident Delay
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Incident Reported By
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Incident Reports By
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Locations
When you click the Basic tab, followed by the Location tab, you can view the fields in Table C-15
in which you can modify the codes. On the Location tab, you can record information about where
an incident occurred.
C-24
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-15: Incidents Location Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department
Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-25
Table C-15: Incidents Location Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
C-26
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Direction
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Direction
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Subsection
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Subsection
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Meridian
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Meridian
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Persons Involved
When you click the Basic tab, followed by the Persons Involved tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-16 in which you can modify the codes. On the Persons Involved tab, you can identify the
Persons and entities involved in an incident.
.
Table C-16: Incidents Persons Involved Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-27
Table C-16: Incidents Persons Involved Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
C-28
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Province
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Other Involvement
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Incident Involvement
Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Highway
When you click the Basic tab, followed by the Highway tab, you can view the fields in Table C-17
in which you can modify the codes. On the Highway tab, you can identify the investigating police
force, cause of emergency, obstruction, and location of emergency.
Table C-17: Incidents Highway Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Investigating Police
Force
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Cause of Emergency
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Location of
Emergency
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-29
Table C-17: Incidents Highway Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Obstruction
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Other
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Aircraft Involved
When you click the Basic tab, followed by the Aircraft Involved tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-18 in which you can modify the codes. On the Aircraft Involved tab, you can identify the
aircraft that was damaged, destroyed, or otherwise damaged in an incident.
C-30
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-18: Incidents Aircraft Involved Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Use
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft use
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Fuel Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft fuel type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Engine Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft engine type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Area of Origin
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft area of fire
origin
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Alert Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft alert type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Actions Taken
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft actions taken
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Problem Areas
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Aircraft problem
areas
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-31
Resources
When you click the Resources tab, you can add codes to the fields in three sub-tabs; Apparatus,
Personnel, and Summary.
On the Apparatus tab, you can identify the units that responded to an incident. You can add codes to
the fields in Table C-19.
Table C-19: Incidents Apparatus Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-32
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Actions Taken
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Actions Taken
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Apparatus or
Resource Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Dispatch Type
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Dispatch Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-19: Incidents Apparatus Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Alarms
Department Codes of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Alarms
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
App Delay
Department Codes of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Apparatus Delay
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
On the Personnel tab, you can identify the fire staff from your department who responded to an
incident. You can add codes to the fields in Table C-20.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-33
Table C-20: Incidents Personnel Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Actions Taken
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Actions Taken
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Role
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Usual Assignment
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Position in Vehicle
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Additional Role
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Fire
When you click the Fire tab, followed by the Property & Ignition tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-21 in which you can modify the codes. On the Property & Ignition tab, you can enter
details about property damaged by a fire and identify factors that contributed to the fire's ignition.
C-34
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-21: Incidents Property & Ignition Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Structure Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Structure Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Cause
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cause of Ignition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Area of Origin
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Area of Fire Origin
or Specific Location
at Time of Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Heat Source
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Heat Source
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-35
Table C-21: Incidents Property & Ignition Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Item
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Item First Ignited or
Contributing Most to
Flame Spread
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type of Material
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Type of Material
First Ignited or
Contributed Most to
Flame
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Factors Contributing
to Ignition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Contributing
to Ignition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
On-Site Materials or
Products
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
On-site Materials
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Roof Covering Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Roof Covering Type
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizable
Field
When you click the Fire tab, followed by the Involved tab, you can view the fields in Table C-23 in
which you can modify the codes. On the Involved tab, you can identify factors involved in the
ignition of the fire.
C-36
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Customize Incidents/Fire/Involved
Table C-22: Incidents Involved Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type (Equipment
Involved in Ignition)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Equipment Involved
in Ignition or
Equipment Involved
in Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Portability
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Equipment
Portability
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Power
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Equipment Power
Source
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-37
Table C-22: Incidents Involved Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Fire Suppression
Factors
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fire Suppression
Factors
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Mobile
Property Involved in
Ignition)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ignition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Involved
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Make
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Make
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
State
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Structure
When you click the Structure tab, followed by the Description & Damage tab, you can view the
fields in Table C-23 in which you can modify the codes. On the Description & Damage tab, you can
describe the damage caused by a building fire.
C-38
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-23: Incidents Structure Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Building Status
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Building Status
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Fire Spread
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fire Spread
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Item
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Item First Ignited or
Contributing Most To
Flame Spread
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-39
Table C-23: Incidents Structure Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Material
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type Of Material
First Ignited Or
Contributed Most To
Flame
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Structure tab, followed by the Systems tab, you can view the fields in Table
C-24 in which you can modify the codes. On the Systems tab, you can identify any detectors and
extinguishment systems that were present in the origin of the fire.
C-40
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-24: Incidents Structure Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type (Detectors)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Power Supply
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Power
Supply
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Operation
(Detectors)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Operation
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Effectiveness
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector
Effectiveness
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Failure Reason
(Detectors)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Failure
Reason
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Automatic
Extinguishment
System)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Type of Automatic
Extinguishing
System
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Operation
(Automatic
Extinguishment
System)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Operation of
Automatic
Extinguishing
System
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-41
Table C-24: Incidents Structure Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Failure Reason
(Automatic
Extinguishment
System)
C-42
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Reason System Not
Effective
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Hazmat
When you click the Hazmat tab, followed by the Release tab, you can view the fields in Table C-25
in which you can modify the codes. On the Release tab, you can describe the conditions of a
hazardous materials release and the control efforts made.
Table C-25: Incidents Hazmat Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Cause of Release
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cause of Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Factors Contributing
To Release
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Contributing
To Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-43
Table C-25: Incidents Hazmat Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Mitigating Factors or
Impediments
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Affecting
Mitigation
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Hazmat Actions
Taken
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Hazmat Actions
Taken
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Population Density
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Population Density
for Hazmat
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Units
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Area Affected or
Area Evacuated
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Which Occurred First
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fire or Explosion
Involved in Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Disposition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Hazmat Disposition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Involved tab, you can view the fields in Table C-26 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Involved tab, you can identify the equipment and mobile property in a hazardous
materials release.
C-44
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-26: Incidents Involved Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type (Equipment
Involved in Release)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Equipment Involved
in Ignition or
Equipment Involved
in Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Mobile
Property Involved in
Release)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Make
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Make
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-45
Table C-26: Incidents Involved Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information,
see “Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Tier Level
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Tier Levels
For information,
see “Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
PPE/Suite Lvl
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Suite/PPE Levels
For information,
see “Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
When you click the Identification tab, you can view the fields in Table C-27 in which you can
modify the codes. On the Identification tab, you can identify the hazardous materials involved in an
incident.
C-46
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
C t
i
I id t /H
t/Id tifi ti
Table C-27: Incidents ID Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
DOT Class
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
DOT Hazard
Classification
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Container Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Units
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Units Capacity or
Units Released
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-47
Table C-27: Incidents ID Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Physical State
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Physical State
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Released Into
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Released Into
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click on the Responsible tab, you can view the field that can be customized.
C-48
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-28: Hazmat Responsible
Customizable
Field
Type
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Hazmat Agency
Responding
For information,
see “Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-49
Arson
When you click the Arson tab, followed by the Investigation tab, you can view the fields in Table
C-29 in which you can modify the codes. On the Investigation tab, you can record the details of an
arson investigation related to an incident.
Table C-29: Incidents Arson Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-50
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Case Status
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Case Status
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Availability of
Material First Ignited
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Availability of
Material First Ignited
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Suspected
Motivation Factors
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Suspected
Motivation Factors
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-29: Incidents Arson Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparent Group
Involvement
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Apparent Group
Involvement
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Entry Method
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Entry Method
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Extent of Fire
Involvement on
Arrival
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Extent of Fire
Involvement
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Property Ownership
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Property Ownership
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Container
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Container for
Incendiary Device
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ignition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Ignition/Delay
Device for
Incendiary Device
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Fuel
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fuel for Incendiary
Device
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Juvenile Firesetter tab, you can view the fields in Table C-30 in which you can
modify the codes. On the Juvenile Firesetter tab, you can to identify juvenile suspects in an arson
investigation.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-51
Table C-30: Incidents Juvenile Firesetter Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-52
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Gender
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Gender
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Race
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Race
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ethnicity
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Ethnicity
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Family Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Family Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-30: Incidents Juvenile Firesetter Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Disposition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Disposition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Motivation/Risk
Factors
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Motivation/Risk
Factors
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Referred To tab, you can view the fields in Table C-31 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Referred To tab, you can identify investigators and outside agencies to which the
arson incident was referred.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-53
Table C-31: Incidents Referred To Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-54
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Casualty
When you click the Casualty tab, followed by the Fire Service tab, you can view the fields in Table
C-32 in which you can modify the codes. On the Fire Service tab, you can identify firefighters who
were injured or killed either as a result of the incident or during the mitigation of the incident. An
injury is physical damage to a person that requires either (a) treatment by a practitioner of medicine
within one year of the incident, or (b) at least one day of restricted activity immediately following
the incident. Deaths include people who die within one year of the incident because of injuries
sustained from the incident.
Table C-32: Incidents Casualty Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Physical Condition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Physical Condition
Just Prior To Injury
For information,
see “Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Usual Assignment
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Usual Assignment
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-55
Table C-32: Incidents Casualty Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Customizable
Field
Activity at Time of
Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Activity at Time of
Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Fire Service Injury tab, you can view the fields in Table C-33 in which you can
modify the codes.
C
C-56
I
d
/C
l /F
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
S
I
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-33: Incidents Fire Service Injury Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Severity
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Severity (Loss Time)
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Primary Symptoms
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Primary Apparent
Symptom
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Area of Body
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Primary Part of Body
Injured
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Cause of Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cause of Firefighter
Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Factors Contributing
to Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Contributing
to Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Object Involved
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Object Involved in
Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Where Injury
Occurred
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Where Injury
Occurred
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-57
Table C-33: Incidents Fire Service Injury Customizable Fields (Continued)
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Specific Location
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Specific Location
Where Injury
Occurred
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Taken To
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Taken To
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Vehicle Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Vehicle Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizable
Field
When you click the Protective Equipment tab, you can view the fields in Table C-34 in which you
can modify the codes. On the Protective Equipment tab, you can identify equipment failures that
contributed to an injury. Complete this section only if protective equipment failed and was a factor
in the injury.
C-58
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-34: Incidents Protective Equipment Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Protective Equipment
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Protective Equipment
Item
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Protective Equipment
Problem
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Protective Equipment
Problem
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-59
When you click the Civilian tab, you can view the fields in Table C-35 in which you can modify the
codes. On the Civilian tab, you can identify civilians who were injured or killed as a result of an
incident. As with fire serviceicasualties, an injury is physical damage to a person that requires
either (a) treatment by a practitioner of medicine within one year of the incident, or (b) at least one
day of restricted activity immediately following the incident. Deaths include people who die within
one year of the incident because of injuries sustained from the incident.
Table C-35: Incidents Civilian Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-60
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-35: Incidents Civilian Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Gender
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Gender
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Race
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Race
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ethnicity
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Ethnicity
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Affiliation
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Affiliation
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-61
When you click the Civilian Injury tab, followed by the Fire Service tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-36 in which you can modify the codes. On the Civilian Injury tab, you can enter details of
a civilian casualty. Civilians include emergency personnel who are not members of the fire
department, such as police officers or utility workers.
Table C-36: Incidents Fire Service Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-62
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Cause of Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cause of Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Activity When
Injured
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Activity When
Injured
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-36: Incidents Fire Service Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Primary Symptom
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Primary Apparent
Symptom
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Factors Contributing
to Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Contributing
to Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Severity
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Severity
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Area of Body
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Body Site of Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Location at Time of
Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Location
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
General Location at
Time of Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
General Location at
Time of Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Specific Location
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Specific Location
Where Injury
Occurred
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-63
Advanced EMS
When you click the Advanced EMS tab, followed by the Scene tab, you can view the fields in Table
C-37 in which you can modify the codes. On the Scene tab, you can to describe the scene of an
incident where emergency medical services were provided.
Table C-37 Incidents Scene Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-64
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
MCI
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Consulting Facility
ID
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Location
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Location Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-37 Incidents Scene Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Service Type
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Service Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Area
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Area Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Response Mode
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Response &
Transport Mode
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Special Factors
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Special Factors
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
When you click the Patient Info tab, you can view the fields in Table C-38 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Patient Info tab, you can create a record for each patient who received EMS
services at an incident.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-65
Table C-38: Incidents Patient Info Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-66
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Title
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Name Prefix
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-38: Incidents Patient Info Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Suffix (Address)
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Gender
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Gender
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Race
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Race
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ethnicity
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Ethnicity
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Code
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Chief Complaint
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-67
When you click the History tab, you can view the fields in Table C-39 in which you can modify the
codes. On the History tab, you can create a profile for an EMS patient.
Table C-39: Incidents History Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-68
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Signs & Symptoms
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Symptoms
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Past Medical History
EMS tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Medical History
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Provider Impression/
Assessment
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Provider Impression
Assessment
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-39: Incidents History Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Cause of Illness/
Injury
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cause of Illness/
Injury
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Severity
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Severity
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Pregnancy
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Pregnancy
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
When you click the Assessment tab, you can view the fields in Table C-40 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Assessment tab, you can enter an assessment of the patient's relevant systems
based on the EMS provider's observations.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-69
Table C-40: Incidents Assessment Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-70
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
HEENT
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
HEENT Assessment
(1)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Lungs/Respiration
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Lungs/Respiration
Assessment (2)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Abdomen/Pelvis
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Abdomen/Pelvis
Assessment (3)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-40: Incidents Assessment Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Extremities
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Extremities
Assessment (4)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Spine/Back
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Spine/Back
Assessment (5)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Skin
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Skin Assessment (6)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Neurological
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Neurological (7)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Cardiac
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Cardiac Assessment
(8)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
GI/GU
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
GI/GU Assessment
(9)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Chest
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Chest Assessment
(10)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Obvious Death
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Obvious Death
Assessment (11)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
When you click the Flow Chart tab, you can view the field listed in Table C-41 in which you can
modify the codes. On the Flow Chart tab, you can create a patient care history by recording each
event (step or phase) in an EMS patient's treatment.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-71
C
I
d
/Ad
d EMS/Fl
Ch
Table C-41: Incidents Flow Chart Customizable Fields
Type
Customizable
Field
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
Aid Given
Medical Actions
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
When you click the Trauma tab, you can view the fields in Table C-42 in which you can modify the
codes. On the Trauma tab, you can record the details of an EMS patient’s injuries.
C-72
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
d
/ d
d
/
Table C-42: Incidents Trauma Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Triage Criteria
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Triage Criteria
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
12 - Bleeding
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Bleeding Assessment
(12)
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Body Site
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Trauma Body Site of
Injury
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-73
Table C-42: Incidents Trauma Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Injury Type
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Injury Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Location
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Trauma Injury
Location
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Severity
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Trauma Injury
Severity
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Injury Intent
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Injury Intent
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
When you click the CPR tab, you can view the fields in Table C-43 in which you can modify the
codes. On the CPR tab, you can describe the CPR care provided to the patient.
C-74
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-43: Incidents CPR Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Provider
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Provider of First CPR
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Pre/Post Arrival
Arrest
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Cardiac Arrest
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Pre/Post Arrival
Arrest Details
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Pre-Arrival Arrest
Details
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-75
Table C-43: Incidents CPR Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Initial Arrest Rhythm
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Initial Arrest Rhythm
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Rhythm at
Destination
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Initial Arrest Rhythm
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Accident tab, you can view the fields in Table C-44 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Accident tab, you can describe EMS services given to a patient involved in a
vehicle accident.
C-76
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-44: Incidents Accident Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Safety Device
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Safety Devices
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Involved/In On
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Vehicle Involvement
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Involved With
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Vehicle Involvement
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Location Re: Vehicle
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Location in Vehicle
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Path
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Ejection Path
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Condition of
Windshield
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Condition of
Windshield
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Condition of Steering
Wheel
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Condition of Steering
Wheel
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-77
When you click the OB/GYN tab, you can view the fields in Table C-45 in which you can modify
the codes. On the OB/GYN tab, you can enter details of the EMS provided to pregnant patients
during an incident.
Table C-45: Incidents OB/GYN Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-78
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Discharge
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Discharge
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Bag of Water
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Bag of Water
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
When you click the Other tab, you can view the fields in Table C-46 in which you can modify the
codes. On the Other tab, you can identify the transporting unit, care facility, and patient disposition
for an EMS incident.
Table C-46: Incidents Other Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Treatment
Authorization
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Treatment
Authorization
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Facility (Medical
Consult)
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Facility Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Method
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Consult Method
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-79
Table C-46: Incidents Other Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
C-80
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Initial
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Initial Level of
Provider
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Highest
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Highest Level of
Provider on Scene
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Originating Facility
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Medical Facilities
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Facility (Receiving
Facility)
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Medical Facilities
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Facility Type
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Hospital Chosen By
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Destination Selection
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Disposition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Disposition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Status
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Status
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
When you click the Billing tab, you can view the fields in Table C-47 in which you can modify the
codes. On the Billing tab, you can identify the guarantor in an EMS incident. Even if the guarantor
is the same as the patient you should complete this tab.
Table C-47: Incidents Billing Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Patient’s Relation to
Guarantor
EMS Codes tab of
the Customize Codes
dialog box
Patient’s Relation to
Guarantor
For information, see
“Entering EMS
Codes” on page 3-14.
Title
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Name Prefix
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Department dialog
box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Department dialog
box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix (Address)
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
When you click the Narrative tab, you can view the fields in Table C-48 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Narrative tab, you can summarize a patient’s EMS treatment.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-81
Table C-48: Incidents Narrative Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Positions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Assignment
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Usual Assignment
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Disclosures tab, you can view the fields in Table C-49 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Disclosures tab, you select a patient’s Disclosure and obtain signatures.
Table C-49: Incidents Narrative Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Language
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Language
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Wildland
When you click the Wildland tab, followed by the Cause & Factors tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-50 in which you can modify the codes. On the Cause & Factors tab, you can identify a
wildland fire’s cause and contributing factors.
C-82
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-50: Incidents Wildland Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Fire Cause
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Wildland Fire Cause
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Heat Source
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Heat Source
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Factors Contributing
to Ignition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Factors Contributing
to Ignition
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-83
Table C-50: Incidents Wildland Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Fire Suppression
Factors
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fire Suppression
Factors
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Mobile Property
Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mobile Property
Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Equipment Involved
in Ignition
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Equipment Involved
in Ignition or
Equipment Involved
in Release
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Property and Responsible tab, you can view the fields in Table C-51 in which
you can modify the codes. On the Property and Responsible tab, you can enter information about
the property and the person responsible for the fire.
C-84
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-51: Incidents Property & Responsible Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
At Origin
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Property
Management
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Area Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Population Density
for Wildland
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Fuel Model at Origin
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fuel Model at Origin
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type of Right of Way
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Type of Right of Way
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Identification
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Person Responsible
for Fire
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Gender
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Gender
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Activity of Person
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Activity of Person
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Weather & Behavior tab, you can view the fields in Table C-52 in which you
can modify the codes. On the Weather & Behavior tab, you can describe the weather at the time of
a wildland fire.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-85
Table C-52: Incidents Weather & Behavior Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-86
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Weather type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Weather type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Fire Danger Rating
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Fire Danger Rating
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Relative Position
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Relative Position on
Slope
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-52: Incidents Weather & Behavior Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Aspect
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Aspect
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Narrative
When you click the Narrative tab, you can view the fields in Table C-53 in which you can modify
the codes. On the Narrative tab, you can summarize a patient’s EMS treatment.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-87
Table C-53: Incidents Narrative Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Position
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Authorization
When you click the Authorization tab, you can view the fields in Table C-54 in which you can
modify the codes. On the Authorization tab, you can authorize and release an incident report. An
incident can’t be exported to NFIRS until it has been authorized.
C-88
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-54: Incidents Authorization Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Position
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-89
Training Form
The Training Form displays information about the employees that have been trained, employees
who need training, and the classes that are available. You can update and schedule classes as
needed.
Training Definition
When you click the Training tab on the desktop and click New, you can view the fields in Table
C-55 in which you can modify the codes. On the Training Definition tab, you can schedule a
training session.
Table C-55: Training Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Method
C-90
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Training Methods
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-55: Training Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Provider
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Training Providers
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Default Result 1
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 1
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Default Result 2
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 2
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Default Result 3
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Other
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other Training
Locations
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Station
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-91
Training Participants
When you click the Participants tab on the desktop and click New, you can view the fields in Table
C-56 in which you can modify the codes. You can use the Training Participants tab to schedule
people for a training session.
Table C-56: Training Participants Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-92
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Shift
Shifts tab of the
Customize
Departments dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Station
Structure tab on the
Customize
Departments dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-56: Training Participants Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus
Basic Info tab of the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Default Result 1
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 1
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Default Result 2
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 2
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Default Result 3
Class Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Setting Up the Class
Explorer Default
Results” on page
4-44.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-93
Training Objectives/Skills
When you click the Training Objectives/Skills tab on the desktop, you can view the fields in Table
C-57 in which you can modify the codes. You can define up to three default results lists. You can
use the Training Participants tab to schedule people for a training session.
Table C-57: Training Obj/Skills Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
C-94
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Default Result 1
Objective Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 1
For information, see
“Setting Up the
Objective Explorer
Default Results” on
page 4-45.
Default Result 2
Objective Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Default Result 2
For information, see
“Setting Up the
Objective Explorer
Default Results” on
page 4-45.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-57: Training Obj/Skills Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Default Result 3
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Objective Explorer
Default Results on
the Customize
Training dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Setting Up the
Objective Explorer
Default Results” on
page 4-45.
Training Authorization
When you click the Training Authorization tab on the desktop, you can view the fields in Table
C-58 in which you can modify the codes. You can use the Training Participants tab to schedule
people for a training session. A training session that is authorized indicates to FireRMS that the
training session is complete and that the results are accurate. The training session is also available
to many FireRMS training reports.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-95
Table C-58: Training Authorization Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Position
C-96
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Other Entries Form
The Other Entries Form enables you to schedule and store results for non-training events. The
Other Entries List displays the current other entry events in FireRMS and allows you to schedule
events, modify and delete events, and filter, sort and print the list.
Other Entries Definition
When you click the Other Entries tab on the desktop and click New, you can view the fields in
Table C-59 in which you can modify the codes. You can use the Other Entries Definition tab to
schedule a new event or modify the details of an existing event.
Table C-59: Other Entries Definition Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Type
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Other Entry Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-97
Table C-59: Other Entries Definition Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
C-98
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Station
Structure of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Default Result 1
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 1
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Default Result 2
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 2
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Default Result 3
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Other Entries Participants
When you click the Other Entries Participants tab on the desktop, you can view the fields in Table
C-60 in which you can modify the codes. You can use the Other Entries Participants tab to add
participants to an event.
Table C-60: Other Entries Participants Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Shift
Shifts tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Station
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-99
Table C-60: Other Entries Participants Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus
Basic Info tab of the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Default Result 1
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 1
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Default Result 2
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 2
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
Default Result 3
Other Entry Results
tab of the Customize
Other Entries dialog
box
Default Result 3
For information, see
“Customizing
Default Results for
Other Entries” on
page 4-50.
C-100
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Other Entries Authorization
When you click the Other Entries Authorization tab on the desktop, you can view the fields in Table
C-61 in which you can modify the codes. You can use the Other Entries Authorization tab to
authorize an event.
Table C-61: Other Entries Authorization Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Position
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-101
Daybook Form
The Daybook tab on your FireRMS desktop contains your activity information. This includes completed and incomplete Incidents, Training Events, Occupancy, and Vehicle and Equipment activity
items.
When you click the Daybook tab on the desktop and click New, you can view the fields in Table
C-62 on the FYI/Request tab in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-62: Daybook Field
Customizable
Field
For Daybook Filter &
____ Shifts
C-102
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Shifts tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Customizing Fields for Daily Roster, Personnel,
Occupancies, Hydrants,
and Vehicles and Equipment
This section describes how to customize fields in the screens you can display by clicking the
following Desktop buttons on the FireRMS desktop; Daily Roster, Personnel, Occupancies,
Hydrants, and Vehicles & Equipment.
Daily Roster
The Daily Roster is a 24-hour view of daily assignments based on your shift schedule and
department structure. The Daily Roster organizes your department's structure into a tree view that
shows detailed assignments for your agency.
When you click the Daily Roster button and then the Roster Entry tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-63 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-103
Table C-63: Daily Roster Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Positions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Assigned To
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Apparatus
Basic Info tab of the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Pay code
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Pay Codes
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Info1
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Roster Info 1
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Info 2
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Roster Info 2
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
C-104
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Personnel Info
The Personnel Info includes a list of the employees in your department, along with additional
information. Using the tabs displayed, you can enter general info about the employees, indicate
how to contact the person, add confidential employee info, attach files to an employee record such
as a diglossia photo, and schedule exception days to an employee's normal shift pattern.
When you click the Personnel Info button and then the List tab, you can view the fields in Table
C-64 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-64: Personnel Info Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Show For Station
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
When you click the Personnel Info button and then the Basic Info tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-65 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-105
Table C-65: Basic Info Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
State
Department Code tab
of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
NFIRS5
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Usual Assignment
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Positions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Status
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Career Status
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
C-106
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-65: Basic Info Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Security Group
Security Groups tab
of the Administration
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Creating Security
Groups and Defining
Access Rights” on
page 3-31.
Schedule
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Assigned To
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Apparatus
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Shift
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
When you click the Personnel Info button and then the Personal tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-66 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-107
Table C-66: Personal Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Gender
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Gender
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Ethnic
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Ethnicity
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Race
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Race
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
When you click the Personnel Info button and then the Scheduling tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-67 in which you can modify the codes.
C-108
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-67: Scheduling Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Schedule
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Assigned To
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Apparatus
Basic Info tab of the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-109
Table C-67: Scheduling Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Position
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Positions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Pay Code
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Pay Codes
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
C-110
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
When you click the Personnel Info button and then the Other Data tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-68 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-68: Other Data Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Employee Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Employee Type
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Employee Status
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Employee Status
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Residency
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Residency
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Retirement System
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Retirement System
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-111
Table C-68: Other Data Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Religious Preference
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Religious Preference
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Rank
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Rank
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Hydrants
The Hydrants module enables you to create records for all the hydrants in your service area.
The Hydrant List provides a list of hydrants that have been entered in FireRMS. From the Hydrant
List you can add hydrants, select existing hydrants, delete hydrants, and filter, sort and print the list.
When you click the Hydrants button and then the List tab, you can view the fields in Table C-69 in
which you can modify the codes.
C-112
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-69: Hydrants Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Show for Station
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
The Hydrant Info contains identifying information for the hydrants. When you click the Hydrants
button and then the Info tab, you can view the fields in Table C-70 in which you can modify the
codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-113
Table C-70: Info Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
C-114
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-70: Info Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
State
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
The Hydrant Activities contains assign and track hydrant inspections and other hydrant-related
actions. Activities are stored with hydrants so that you can review a hydrant's activity status and
history. When you click the Hydrants button and then the Activities tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-71 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-115
Table C-71: Activities Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Action
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Actions tab of the
Customize Hydrants
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Creating Hydrant
Actions” on page 4-2.
Using the Hydrants Schedule, you can schedule on-going activities like hydrant inspections that
can be assigned, tracked, and marked as complete on the Activities tab. When you click the
Hydrants button and then the Schedule tab, you can view the fields in Table C-72 in which you can
modify the codes.
C-116
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-72: Schedule Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Action
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Actions tab of the
Customize Hydrants
dialog box.
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Creating Hydrant
Actions” on page 4-2.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-117
Occupancies
Occupancies contains a list the occupancies in your service area. From the Occupancy List you can
add new occupancies, select existing occupancy records, delete occupancy records, and filter, sort
and print the list.
The Occupancy List provides new occupancies, select existing occupancy records, delete
occupancy records, and filter, sort and print the list. When you click the Occupancies button and
then the List tab, you can view the fields in Table C-73 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-73: Occupancy/List Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Show for Station
C-118
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Structure tab of the
Customize
Departments dialog
box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-73: Occupancy/List Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Show for Use
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Occupancy Use
Codes
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
Using the Occupancies Basic Data, you can record basic data about an occupancy. When you click
the Occupancies button and then the Basic Data tab, you can view the fields in Table C-74 in which
you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-119
Table C-74: Basic Data Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Type
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Station
Structure tab of the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
C-120
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Using the Occupancies Contact, you can record contact person for an occupancy. When you click
the Occupancies button and then the Contacts tab, you can view the fields in Table C-75 in which
you can modify the codes.
Table C-75: Contact Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Other
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Incident Involvement
Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Prefix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-121
Table C-75: Contact Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type (Address)
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Types
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Suffix
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Street Directions
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
State
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
States & Provinces
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Using the Occupancies Building, you can record building related details for an occupancy. When
you click the Occupancies button and then the Building tab, you can view the fields in Table C-76
in which you can modify the codes.
C-122
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-76: Building Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Structure Type
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Structure Type
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Building Status
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Building Status
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Construction (Main
Floor)
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Construction Codes >
Floor
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-123
Table C-76: Building Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Interior
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Construction Codes >
Interior
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Exterior
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Construction Codes >
Exterior
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Construction Type
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Construction Types
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Building Style
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Building Style
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Structure Type
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Material
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Roof Codes > Roof
Materials
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Construction (Roof)
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Construction Codes >
Roof
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Upper Floor
Construction
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Construction Codes >
Floor
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
C-124
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Using the Occupancies More Building, you can record additional building information including
use, prevention systems, and materials and products stored. When you click the Occupancies button
and then the More Building tab, you can view the fields in Table C-77 in which you can modify the
codes.
Table C-77: More Building Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Occupancy Use
Codes tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Occupancy Use
Codes > Occupancy
Use
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Property Uses
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Property Use
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-125
Table C-77: More Building Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Mixed Use
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Mixed Use Property
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Detector)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Power Supply
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Power
Supply
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Automatic
Extinguishing
System)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Type of Automatic
Extinguishing
System
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
On-Site Materials or
Products
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
On-site Materials
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Using the Occupancies Prevention Info, and Systems tab, you can create a field of detector and
extinguishment systems in place at an occupancy. When you click the Occupancies button and then
Prevention Info and the Systems tab, you can view the fields in Table C-78 in which you can
modify the codes
C-126
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-78: Systems Customizable Fields
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Type (AES)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Type of Automatic
Extinguishing
System
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Type (Detectors)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Detector Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizable
Field
Using the Occupancies Prevention Info, and Hazmat tab, you can identify any hazardous materials
that are stored or processed at the occupancy. When you click the Occupancies button and then
Prevention Info and the Hazmat tab, you can view the fields in Table C-79 in which you can modify
the codes
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-127
Table C-79: Hazmat Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Units (Amount on
Hand)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Units Capacity or
Units Released
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Class
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Container Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Units (Container)
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Units Capacity or
Units Released
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
C-128
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Using the Occupancies Prevention Info, and Permits tab, you can enter details about permits
attached Systems, Hazmat and Other Info entries. When you click the Occupancies button and then
Prevention Info and the Permits tab, you can view the fields in Table C-80 in which you can modify
the codes
Table C-80: Permits Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Permit
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Permits tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
System
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
The Occupancies Activities to assign actions (like permit inspections) to an occupancy, track
actions to completion and record the findings. This information is stored with the occupancy so that
you can easily review and report on the history, status and results of each action. When you click
the Occupancies button and then the Activities tab, you can view the fields in Table C-81 in which
you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-129
Table C-81: Activities Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Action
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Actions tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Using the Occupancies Letters, you can create letters for occupancies. When you click the
Occupancies button and then the Letters tab, you can view the fields in Table C-82 in which you
can modify the codes.
C-130
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-82: Letters Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Template
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Letter Templates of
the Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
Using the Occupancies Schedules, you can schedule on-going activities that can be assigned,
tracked, recorded and marked as complete on the Activities tab. A primary use of this tab is to
schedule ongoing permit inspections or other types of inspections that recur on a regular basis.
When you click the Occupancies button and then the Schedules tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-83 in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-131
Table C-83: Schedules Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Action
C-132
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Actions tab of the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Customizing
Occupancies” on
page 4-6.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Vehicles & Equipment
Vehicles & Equipment allows you to create and maintain records of all vehicles and equipment
used by your department as well as those that belong to outside agencies, but may appear in your
incident report.
Using the Vehicles & Equipment > Vehicle Info and Basic, you can enter basic identifying
information for a vehicle. When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and then Vehicle Info
and the Basic tab, you can view the fields in Table C-84 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-84: Basic Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Category
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus or
Resource Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-133
Table C-84: Basic Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Supplier
Department Codes
tab of the Department
Codes dialog box
Supplier
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Manufacturer
Department Codes
tab of the Department
Codes dialog box
Manufacturer
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Owner
Department Codes
tab of the Department
Codes dialog box
Other Agencies
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Using the Vehicles & Equipment > Vehicle Info and Drive Chain, you can record information on a
units drive train. When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and then Vehicle Info and the
Drive Train tab, you can view the fields in Table C-85 in which you can modify the codes.
C-134
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-85: Drive Train Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Displacement (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
&Equipment dialog
box
ci, cc or liters
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Clutch Size (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
&Equipment dialog
box
in or cm
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-135
Table C-85: Drive Train Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Pressure Plate (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
&Equipment dialog
box
in or cm
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Capacity (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
&Equipment dialog
box
gallons or liters
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Using the Vehicles & Equipment > Vehicle Info and Chassis, you can record information on a units
chassis. When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and then Vehicle Info and the Chassis
tab, you can view the fields in Table C-86 in which you can modify the codes.
C-136
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-86: Chassis Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Certified Gross
Vehicular Weight
(units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
lb, tons, kg, or mt
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Total (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
lb, tons, kg, or mt
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
The Vehicles & Equipment > Vehicle Info and Pump to record information about a vehicle pump.
When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and then Vehicle Info and the Pump tab, you can
view the fields in Table C-87 in which you can modify the codes.
V hi l
&E i
/V hi l I f /P
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-137
Table C-87: Pump Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Lubricant Capacity
(units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
quarts, gallons, or
liters
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Water Tank Capacity
(units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
gallons or liters
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Foam Tank Capacity
(units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
gallons or liters
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Suction Size (units)
Defaults tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
in or cm
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Using Vehicles & Equipment > Equipment Info and Basic, you can enter general information about
a piece of equipment. When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and then Equipment Info
and the Basic tab, you can view the fields in Table C-88 in which you can modify the codes.
C-138
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-88: Basic Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Category
Equipment
Categories tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
Group
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Supplier
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Suppliers
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-139
Table C-88: Basic Customizable Fields (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Sub Category
Equipment
Categories tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
Description
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Manufacturer
Department Codes
tab of the Customize
Codes dialog box
Manufacturers
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Using the Vehicles & Equipment and Activities, you can assign actions (such as preventative
maintenance and repairs) to vehicles and equipment. This information is stored with the vehicle or
equipment record so that you can easily review and report on the history and status of all activities.
When you click the Vehicles & Equipment button and the Activities tab, you can view the fields in
Table C-89 in which you can modify the codes.
C-140
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-89: Activities Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Action
Actions tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Creating a List of
Equipment Actions”
on page 4-27.
Assignment Explorer
Assignments tab on
the Customize
Vehicles &
Equipment dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Customizing
Vehicles, Equipment,
and Locations” on
page 4-25.
Using the Vehicles & Equipment and Schedule, you can schedule on-going activities that can be
assigned, tracked, and marked as complete on the Activities tab. A primary use of this tab is to
schedule ongoing maintenance or other types of actions that recur on a regular basis. When you
click the Vehicles & Equipment button and the Schedule tab, you can view the fields in Table C-90
in which you can modify the codes.
Customizing Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries and Daybook Forms
C-141
Table C-90: Schedule Customizable Fields
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Action
Actions tab of the
Customize Vehicles
& Equipment dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Creating a List of
Equipment Actions”
on page 4-27.
Assignment Explorer
Assignments tab on
the Customize
Vehicles &
Equipment dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Creating Staff or
Department
Structures Available
For Assignments” on
page 4-29.
C-142
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
There are several FireRMS finders and explorers you can use to lookup information. This section
lists the finder and explorer dialog boxes with fields you can customize.
Agency Finder
Using the Agency Finder, you can choose mutual aid agencies for Incident reports. You can view
the fields in Table C-91 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-91: Agency Finder
Customizable
Field
Agency List Box
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab on the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Other Agencies
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-143
Apparatus Finder
Using the Apparatus Finder, you can choose the apparatus that responded to an Incident. You can
view the fields in Table C-92 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-92: Apparatus Finder
Customizable
Field
Apparatus List Box
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Basic Info tab on the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Note: If an N/A appears in the Category You Can Customize column of a table, the
codes are not contained in a category. You can change the available codes by adding to, or
removing from, the list of codes displayed.
C-144
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Hydrants Assignment Explorer
Using the Hydrants Assignment Explorer, you can view the list of hydrants listed in FireRMS. You
can view the fields in Table C-93 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-93: Hydrants Assignment Explorer
Customizable
Field
Assignments
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Assignments tab on
the Customize
Hydrants dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Selecting Staff To
Be Assigned Hydrant
Activities.”
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-145
Occupancies Assignments Explorer
Using the Occupancies Assignment Explorer, you can select from the list of Occupancies listed in
FireRMS. You can view the fields in Table C-94 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-94: Occupancies Assignment Explorer
Customizable
Field
Assignments
C-146
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Assignments tab on
the Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Entering Staff
Available for
Occupancy
Assignments” on
page 4-9.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Vehicles Assignment Explorer
Using the Vehicles Assignments Explorer you can choose a person or department structure for
vehicles or equipment. You can then choose an activity to be performed on that vehicle or
equipment from the Vehicles and Equipment Activities tab. You can view the fields in Table C-95
in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-95: Vehicles Assignments Explorer
Customizable
Field
Assignments
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Assignments tab on
the Customize
Vehicles &
Equipment dialog
box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Entering Staff
Available for
Occupancy
Assignments” on
page 4-9.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-147
City Finder
Using the City Finder, you can select a city, in addition to zip codes, districts, census tracts, and
counties. You can view the fields in Table C-96 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-96: City Finder
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Cities
Cities tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Entering Cities” on
page 3-25.
Zip Codes
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Zip Code
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
Districts
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Districts
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
C-148
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-96: City Finder (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Census Tracts
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Census Tract
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
Counties
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Counties
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
Agencies
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Agency
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
Other
Numbers tab on the
Customize Cities
dialog box
Other
For information, see
“Entering Numbers
for Cities” on page
3-26.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-149
Credentials Earned Explorer
Using the Credentials Earned Explorer, you can select from the possible list of credentials which
measure a person’s progress towards a particular goal, such as certification. You can view the fields
in Table C-97 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-97: Credentials Earned Explorer
Customizable
Field
Provider
C-150
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab on the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Training Providers
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
External Participants
Using the External Participants, you can add participants from outside your department to a training
session or other scheduled activity. You can view the fields in Table C-98 in which you can modify
the codes.
Table C-98: External Participants
Customizable
Field
Agency
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab on the Customize
Codes dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Other Agencies
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-151
Occupancy Finder Explorer
Using the Occupancy Finder Explorer, you can search for the list of occupancies for a location of
the Incident report. You can view the fields in Table C-99 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-99: Occupancy Finder Explorer
Customizable
Field
Show for Station
C-152
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Findings tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
N/A
For information, see
“Creating a List of
Occupancy Findings”
on page 4-8.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Incident Filter
Using the Incident Filter, you can specify the items by which to filter the Incidents. You can view
the fields in Table C-100 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-100: Incident Filter
Customizable
Field
Incident Type
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
901 Codes tab on the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Incident Type
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-153
Occupancy Finder
Using the Occupancy Finder, you can search for occupancies as the location of the Incident. You
can view the fields in Table C-101 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-101: Occupancy Finder
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Show for Station
Structure tab on the
Customize
Department dialog
box
Station
For information, see
“Setting Up The
Department
Structure” on page
3-4.
Show for Use
901 Codes tab of the
Customize Codes
dialog box
Occupancy Use
For information, see
“Entering 901
Sub-Codes” on page
3-12.
C-154
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Storage Tanks
Using the Storage Tanks dialog, you can record information about a tank used to house hazardous
materials at any occupancy site. You can view the fields in Table C-102 in which you can modify
the codes.
Table C-102: Storage Tanks
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Manufacturer
Codes tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Storage Tank
Codes>Manufacturer
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
Tank Construction
Codes tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Storage Tank
Codes>Tank
Construction
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-155
Table C-102: Storage Tanks (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Pipe Type
Codes tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Storage Tank
Codes>Pipe Type
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
Monitor Type
Codes tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Storage Tank
Codes>Monitor Type
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
Vapor Recovery
System
Codes tab on the
Customize
Occupancies dialog
box
Storage Tank
Codes>Vapor
Recovery System
For information, see
“Creating Groups
and Assigning
Building Codes” on
page 4-13.
C-156
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Street Finder
Using the Street Finder, you can select from the listing of streets when entering address
information. You can view the fields in Table C-103 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-103: Street Finder
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Streets
Customize Streets
N/A
For information, see
“Entering Streets” on
page 3-28.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-157
Training Filter
Using the Training Filter, you can specify the items by which to filter the Training sessions. You
can view the fields in Table C-104 in which you can modify the codes.
Table C-104: Training Filter
Customizable
Field
Method
C-158
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Department Codes
tab on the Customize
Codes dialog box
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Training Methods
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Table C-104: Training Filter (Continued)
Customizable
Field
Tab/Dialog Box
Used To Change
The Codes
Category You Can
Customize
Procedure To
Modify The Codes
Apparatus Unit ID
Basic Info tab on the
Customize Apparatus
dialog box
N/A
For information, see
“Adding Apparatus
and Staffing
Apparatus” on page
3-18.
Other Locations
Department Codes
tab on the Customize
Codes dialog box
Other Training
Locations
For information, see
“Entering
Department Codes”
on page 3-10.
Shift
Shifts tab on the
Customize
Department dialog
box
N/A
For information, see
“Entering
Department Shift
Patterns” on page
3-6.
Customizing Fields for Finders and Explorers
C-159
C-160
Appendix C: Customizing Field Codes
D
D
Setting up the Master Name
Index Feature
Appendix A:
The Master Name Index (MNI) feature is available with FireRMS 4.5 SP1 and provides a quick and
easy way to search, select or enter all information pertaining to people in a standardized format.
The standardized format provides greater accuracy while significantly reducing redundancy. In
addition, the indexing of the centralized data provides for quick and accurate retrieval of associated
data such as aliases, address & contact history, identifying marks and involved incidents.
Note: Activating the Master Name Index option does not change or update any of your
existing information. Deactivating the Master Name Index option does not cause any loss
of data in your new or existing FireRMS records.
Setting Up the Master Name Index Feature
1. Create the Master Name Index Database.
Launch
and Logon to the SQL Utils program.
on the Master Name Index checkbox and use the Create button to create a new
Master Name Index Database. You may accept the default name provided on the create
form or enter your own name for the MNI database.
Click
2. Connect MNI to FireRMS.
After
the Database has been created, clear the Master Name Index checkbox to display
the list of your local FireRMS database(s).
Select the MNI database from the dropdown list box titled Master Name Index.
A prompt displays to allow you to choose whether or not to import all current name records
into the MNI database.
D-1
You
may share the MNI database between multiple FireRMS databases when they are
hosted on a single SQL Server, or you may create multiple MNI databases so each FireRMS
database may use its own copy.
After you have setup the MNI database and associated it with a FireRMS database, the
next time FireRMS is run, the following forms prompt the users to select from or enter
information into the MNI system:
Persons Involved
EMS/NEMSIS Patient
Civilian Casualty
Occupancy Contact
Note: If you are using FireRMS Mobile, you have to drop the mobiles and remove the
publication before connecting to a MNI database. This requirement ensures your mobile
users will be able to use the new system.
Using the Master Name Index Feature
When adding a person to an Incident or Occupancy, the Master Name Index connection allows you
to enter data more efficiently and easily.
The following section describes the different forms that you can use for the Master Index feature.
1. On the Master Name Index Forms, click Add to add a new name to any form.
2. On the MNI Search Form, click on the button labeled Get All to return the complete list of
all names, or search for a name by typing in at least two characters for either the first or last
name. As the letters are added, the form automatically updates to show all records that
match the search criteria:
D-2
User’s Guide
3. The following screenshot shows the MNI Form with returned data. Select the correct name,
the click the Save/Update button to fill the information into the FireRMS form..
4. If you do not see any match for the current person, you may choose to make a new entry in
the MNI database by clicking the Add New button.
This activates the MNI Data Entry form.
D-3
5. On the Data Entry Form, Enter as much or as little information as needed to both properly
fill out the FireRMS form and to also identify the person for future reference.
The
comments box allows you to communicate information to other FireRMS users who
may encounter this person when filling out future reports.
The Proper Case function allows you to enter the data in all lower or upper case and then
transform it into proper case for better display.
If the person’s address is the same as the Incident Location, you can use the Incident
Address box to pull that information into the MNI data entry form.
The Address History form allows you to update information when a person moves while
still retaining the same name link and information in the MNI database.
D-4
User’s Guide
6. The Address History form displays the address history of the person or organization
associated with the record.
Note the following additional information:
Importing the existing data into the MNI database during the setup in SQL Utils may take several
minutes. That time is extended for each additional FireRMS database you connect to a single MNI
database when choosing to import the current data.
The first time you run FireRMS after importing the data there will also be a slight delay while the
connection is completed. That delay will occur one time only.
Because fields on the forms listed above become read only fields when the MNI connection is in
use, Local User Defined Mandatory fields should be removed from those forms before enabling the
MNI connection.
Fields required by NFIRS will continue to show as required when they are empty, but the user
needs to enter the data on the MNI form in order to populate the data correctly into FireRMS. If you
need to update fields after the MNI connection was initially established, use SQL Utils to remove
the connection (clear the dropdown box). Make the desired changes to the forms and then reselect
the MNI database in SQL Utils. You do not need to reimport your names when reconnecting to a
previously established MNI database.
Height and Weight may be entered on the MNI person form for identification purposes, but that
information is not be copied back into an EMS form when selecting a person from the MNI list.
D-5
This is because height and weight may change and should always be rechecked during an EMS
assessment. Similarly, the field Age will not be auto populated unless a specific Date of Birth has
been logged in the MNI person form.
During the initial import of data, records that include identical Name, DOB and address will be
merged into a single record.
A future update to the Master Name Index form will allow the Administrator to manually merge
records as needed.
D-6
E
E
Quick Reference
Appendix A:
The “How do I...” questions listed in this appendix reference all major procedures described
in this guide. These questions appear in alphabetical order. If navigating the PDF file, click
the page number to jump to the referenced section.
How do I…
Activate Design Mode ........................................................................................................ page 5-8
Add Apparatus .................................................................................................................. page 3-18
Add Personnel.................................................................................................................... page 3-21
Add Sub-Categories .......................................................................................................... page 4-31
Allow User’s To Create New Records From a Mobile Device ...................................... page 6-13
Change a User’s Login Information................................................................................ page 6-13
Change Field Labels.......................................................................................................... page 4-61
Change Field Visibility ..................................................................................................... page 4-61
Change Object Properties ................................................................................................ page 4-58
Change Tab Caption ......................................................................................................... page 4-51
Change Tab Visibility ....................................................................................................... page 4-51
Change Tab Sort Order.................................................................................................... page 4-51
Change the Location of a Field ........................................................................................ page 4-59
Change the Desktop Font Size ........................................................................................... page 1-6
Choose a Reporting Method............................................................................................. page 5-11
Choose an Occupancy Numbering Scheme .................................................................... page 4-19
Create a List of Building Codes ....................................................................................... page 4-13
Create a List of Building Related Actions......................................................................... page 4-7
Create a List of Equipment Actions ................................................................................ page 4-27
Create a List of Objectives and Skills ............................................................................. page 4-33
Create a List of Occupancy Findings ................................................................................ page 4-8
Create a List of Occupancy Related Permits.................................................................. page 4-11
Create a List of Staff and Assignments ........................................................................... page 4-29
Create a List of Standards Linked to Occupancy Findings .......................................... page 4-12
E-1
Create Classes .................................................................................................................... page 4-35
Create Credentials............................................................................................................. page 4-38
Create Custom Advanced EMS Protocols ...................................................................... page 4-45
Create Custom Tabs For Incident, Advanced EMS, or Occupancies .......................... page 4-52
Create Disclosures ............................................................................................................. page 4-47
Create Equipment Categories .......................................................................................... page 4-25
Create New Advanced EMS Tabs.................................................................................... page 4-52
Create New Incident Records From a Mobile Device.................................................... page 6-13
Create New Incident Tabs ................................................................................................ page 4-52
Create New Occupancy Records From a Mobile Device............................................... page 6-13
Create Security Groups .................................................................................................... page 3-31
Create Standards............................................................................................................... page 4-31
Create Hydrant Actions...................................................................................................... page 4-2
Create Templates for Occupancy-Related Letters......................................................... page 4-16
Customize Advanced EMS Disclosures........................................................................... page 4-47
Customize Advanced EMS Tabs...................................................................................... page 4-51
Customize Codes ............................................................................................................... page 3-10
Customize Data.................................................................................................................. page 1-13
Customize Default Results Fields..................................................................................... page 4-50
Customize Default Results for Other Entries ................................................................. page 4-50
Customize Field Codes....................................................................................................... page C-1
Customize Fields for Daily Roster, Personnel, Occupancies, Hydrants,
and Vehicles and Equipment................................................................................... page C-103
Customize Fields for Incident, Training, Other Entries, and Daybook Forms.......... page C-22
Customize Fields for Finders and Explorers ............................................................... page C-143
Customize Fields for the Tools/Customize Menu Commands ....................................... page C-2
Customize Hydrants............................................................................................................ page 4-2
Customize Incidents .......................................................................................................... page 4-20
Customize Incident Tabs .................................................................................................. page 4-51
Customize Module Selections ............................................................................................. page 1-9
Customize Occupancies ...................................................................................................... page 4-6
Customize Other Entries .................................................................................................. page 4-50
Customize Tab Labels....................................................................................................... page 4-51
Customize Tab Sort Order ............................................................................................... page 4-51
Customize Tab Visibility .................................................................................................. page 4-51
Customize Training........................................................................................................... page 4-31
Customize Vehicles, Equipment & Locations................................................................. page 4-25
Customize Your Department’s EMS Codes .................................................................... page D-1
Decrypt Patient Data........................................................................................................... page 5-3
Define Access Rights ......................................................................................................... page 3-31
Determine the Information Personnel Can View ........................................................... page 1-10
Disable Automatic Incident Numbers .............................................................................. page 5-3
Disable Dynamic Property Changes ................................................................................. page 5-8
Disable Mandatory Fields................................................................................................ page 5-14
E-2
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
Disable Recommended Fields.......................................................................................... page 5-14
Display Mandatory Fields ............................................................................................... page 5-14
Display Recommended Fields ......................................................................................... page 5-14
Display the Version 2 Advanced EMS Tabs .................................................................. page 4-51
Enable Automatic Updates................................................................................................ page 6-1
Enable Dynamic Property Changes ................................................................................. page 5-8
Enable Mandatory Fields ................................................................................................ page 5-14
Enable Recommended Fields .......................................................................................... page 5-14
Enable User Login............................................................................................................... page 5-2
Encrypt Patient Data .......................................................................................................... page 5-3
Enter 901 Sub-Codes......................................................................................................... page 3-12
Enter Basic Department Information ............................................................................... page 3-1
Enter Block Ranges for a Street ...................................................................................... page 3-30
Enter Cities ........................................................................................................................ page 3-25
Enter Department Codes.................................................................................................. page 3-10
Enter Department Information ......................................................................................... page 3-1
Enter Employee Contact Information............................................................................. page 3-23
Enter EMS Sub-Codes...................................................................................................... page 3-14
Enter Numbers for Cities ................................................................................................. page 3-26
Enter Staff Available for Occupancy Assignments.......................................................... page 4-9
Enter Streets ...................................................................................................................... page 3-28
Enter the Department Shift Patterns ................................................................................ page 3-6
Filter Data .......................................................................................................................... page 1-10
Install FireRMS Software................................................................................................... page 2-2
Install Software on a Mobile Device .................................................................................. page 2-5
Learn About Advanced Incident Reporting Features ..................................................... page 1-6
Learn About Desktop Buttons ........................................................................................... page 1-4
Learn About Desktop Tabs ................................................................................................ page 1-3
Learn About FireRMS Fill-in Fields ................................................................................. page 1-6
Limit Incident Records Created On a Mobile Device.................................................... page 6-13
Make a Field Invisible/Visible.......................................................................................... page 4-59
Make a Field Label Invisible/Visible ............................................................................... page 4-59
Manually Enter Incident Numbers.................................................................................... page 5-3
Map EMS Translation Codes........................................................................................... page 4-24
Modify a Previously Created Tab.................................................................................... page 4-56
Protect the Daily Roster and Personnel Module .............................................................. page 5-6
Protect the Daybook and Desktop ..................................................................................... page 5-2
Reconcile Mobile Incidents and Apparatus.....................................................................................
Restrict Access To Data ................................................................................................... page 1-13
Restrict Employee Contact Information......................................................................... page 3-23
Retire Occupancy Groups ................................................................................................ page 4-13
Retire Occupancy Codes................................................................................................... page 4-13
Retire Construction Group Codes................................................................................... page 4-13
Select a Color Indicator For Mandatory Fields ............................................................ page 5-14
E-3
Select a Color Indicator For Recommended Fields ...................................................... page 5-14
Select a Hydrant Numbering Scheme................................................................................ page 4-5
Select Aid Given Codes Forms ......................................................................................... page 4-22
Select an Alternate Spell Check Dictionary ...................................................................... page 5-9
Select Centralized Reporting............................................................................................ page 5-11
Select Default Settings....................................................................................................... page 4-23
Select Local Reporting ...................................................................................................... page 5-11
Select Mandatory Fields ................................................................................................... page 4-59
Select Mobile Preferences ................................................................................................. page 6-13
Select Recommended Fields ............................................................................................. page 4-59
Select Staff To Be Assigned Hydrant Activities................................................................ page 4-3
Set Billing Rates for Incidents.......................................................................................... page 4-20
Set Default Measurement Units ....................................................................................... page 4-26
Set the Default Desktop Page ............................................................................................. page 5-1
Set Centralized Reporting ................................................................................................ page 5-11
Set Local Reporting........................................................................................................... page 5-11
Setup Additional FireRMS Modules ................................................................................. page 1-8
Setup a Mobile Device......................................................................................................... page 7-1
Setup Default Objects and Skills...................................................................................... page 4-43
Setup FireRMS .................................................................................................................... page 1-7
Setup FireRMS Mobile ....................................................................................................... page 7-1
Setup the Class Explorer Default Results ....................................................................... page 4-44
Setup the Department Structure........................................................................................ page 3-4
Setup the Objective Explorer Default Results ................................................................ page 4-45
Turn Off the Refresh Timer ............................................................................................... page 5-4
Turn On/Off the Welcome Wizard.................................................................................... page 5-3
Understand Assigning Access Rights................................................................................ page A-1
Unretire Occupancy Codes............................................................................................... page 4-13
Use an Alternate Spell Check Dictionary.......................................................................... page 5-9
Use NT Logins...................................................................................................................... page 5-3
View Chemical Codes........................................................................................................ page 3-15
View Information About the FireRMS Client ................................................................ page 6-13
View Setup Procedures ....................................................................................................... page 1-7
View System Information ................................................................................................... page 6-1
E-4
F
F
Getting Help
Appendix A:
At ZOLL, we take as much pride in our technical support and custom solutions as we do in our software. We know you will have questions so we have a full staff of well-trained, talented, and intelligent people ready to help you.
Technical support
We have a clearly defined commitment to help you use our software.
Technical support is available to help in these areas
•
Software-related questions. Our support technicians can answer your questions about how our
software works and provide advice about the best way to use it to perform specific tasks.
•
Installation and maintenance procedures. Our support technicians can explain the correct installation and maintenance procedures for our software and related third-party software on which
our products depend.
•
Problem resolution. Our support technicians can assist you in times of system failure, accept
problem and bug reports, and provide information and workaround, along with time frames for
resolution.
Areas outside the scope of technical support
•
Consulting and training. Our support technicians are not trainers who can teach you, for example, how to bill; however, we can sometimes suggest a consultant.
•
Hardware support. For hardware issues unrelated to our software, we recommend that you find
a local hardware consultant who can assist you. If you are unsure whether your issue is hardware or software related, please call us. Often, a short call can quickly help you get on the right
path to finding a solution.
•
Custom solutions. If you want assistance creating custom reports, forms, add-ons, and interfaces to third-party hardware and software, our Custom Solutions Group can work with you on
a contract basis. Please see “Custom solutions” on page F-2..
F-1
Your maintenance contract
Support is provided free of charge for 90 days from the time of purchase. To receive ongoing
support after that, you must purchase a maintenance contract. For more information, please contact
our Sales department.
Contact information
To help us address your problem in the quickest and most effective way possible, please provide as
much specific information as possible, including when the problem began and whether it affects all
RescueNet workstations.
Whether you email or call, your issue is routed to a technician specializing in your product who
generates a ticket in our problem-resolution database and works with you to answer your question
or resolve the issue.
Often the most effective way for our staff to assist you is to be able to re-create the issue at your site
via a remote connection. To enable this, we recommend that you maintain a RescueNet workstation
with Symantec pcAnywhere™ version 11.0 or higher, Microsoft RDP (Terminal Services), or VNC
installed.
Support hours
8:00 A.M. - 8:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Monday - Friday, except holidays
Email
[email protected]
Telephone
In the U.S. and Canada: +1 (800) 663-3911, ext 3, option 5
From other countries:
+1 (303) 801-0000, ext 3, option 5
Fax
+1 (303) 801-0001
Internet
www.zolldata.com/Support
Mail
ZOLL Technical Support Department
11802 Ridge Parkway, Suite 400
Broomfield, CO 80021
USA
Custom solutions
If you want to maximize the capabilities of our software with custom reports, forms, add-ons, and
interfaces to third-party hardware and software, our Custom Solutions Group can work with you to
provide a solution.
F-2
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
To discuss custom solutions, please contact our Custom Solutions Group. They will discuss your
requirements with you and prepare a contract. Upon your acceptance of the contract, work can
begin on your solution.
Hours
10:00 A.M. - 7:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Monday - Friday, except holidays
Email
[email protected]
Telephone
In the U.S. and Canada: +1 (800) 663-3911, ext 6
From other countries:
+1 (303) 801-0000, ext 6
Mail
ZOLL
Custom Solutions Group
11802 Ridge Parkway, Suite 400
Broomfield, CO 80021
USA
F-3
F-4
Index
84639
Modifying Published or Saved Tabs 4-56
901 Codes tab field descriptions 3-14
901 sub-codes
entering 3-12
A
about this guide 0-xii
access
to forms 1-13
to menus 1-13
to the desktop 1-13
Access levels A-1
Access rights
creating 3-31
Actions
building-related 4-7
add recommended fields 1-9
Adobe Acrobat 0-xiii
Advanced EMS 1-3
Aid Given codes forms
selecting 4-22
Apparatus
adding 3-18
Apparatus Basic Info tab field descriptions 3-20
Assignments
for Hydrant activities 4-3
staff for 4-9
autoincrement
Hydrants 4-5
autoincrements
occupancy 4-19
Basic EMS 1-3
Battalion 1-11
billing rates
for Incidents 4-20
Block ranges
defining for streets 3-30
Blocks
tab field descriptions 3-30
book conventions 0-xiii
cross-references 0-xiii
information highlighting 0-xiii
typographical conventions 0-xiii
Building codes
creating 4-13
Building-related actions
creating 4-7
Setting Up the Database
Numerics
B
C
CAD 7-7
Cameo Link Tools 1-6
CAS No 3-17
Central reporting
selecting 5-12
uses for 5-11
check box 4-55
chemical
tab field descriptions 3-16
Chemical codes
viewing 3-16
Cities
entering 3-25
City numbers
entering 3-26
Class
retired 4-36
Class Explorer defaults
setting 4-44
Index-1
Classes
creating 4-35
client software
installing 2-2
code
define for a category or skill 4-33
for category or class 4-35
Codes
construction
retiring codes 4-14
retiring groups 4-14
unretiring 4-15
codes
customizing 3-10
Collector tool
synchronize databases 1-3
color
in fill-in fields 1-6
combo box 4-54
Communication tab field descriptions 3-24
creating in custom tabs 4-54–4-55
creating new on a mobile device 7-6
Occupancies 7-6
Credential Requirements
Initial 4-42
Renewal 4-42
Credentials
categories for 4-38
creating 4-38
Credentials tab field descriptions 4-39
cross-references 0-xiii
Custom Solutions Group E-2
Custom tabs 4-52
modifying 4-56
customize 4-31
training 4-31
customizing codes 3-10
customizing data 1-10, 1-13
D
Daily Roster 5-6
limiting access to 5-6
viewing daily assignments 1-4
Index-2
Database
FireRMS
synchronize with Collector database 1-3
date format
setting 5-6–5-7
Date/Time field 4-55
Daybook
tasks for the current user 1-4
Default desktop
setting 5-1
Default measurement units
for vehicles and equipment 4-25
setting 4-26
Default values
assigning to data elements 4-62
deleting 4-49
Department 1-11
Department Basic Info
tab field descriptions 3-2
Department Codes
customizing 3-10
Department codes field tab descriptions 3-12
Department information
entering 3-1
Department shift patterns
entering 3-6
Department structure B-1
Large Agency B-1
Moderate Agency B-3
setting up 3-4
Small Agency B-4
Department structures available for assignment
creating 4-29
Design mode
activating 5-8
Desktop
default 3-32
Filter settings 1-12
desktop 1-1
buttons 1-4
Filter 1-12
tabs 1-3
dictionary
changing default 5-8–5-9
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
E
editing 4-52
Email
sending to other FireRMS users 1-4
employee contact information
entering 3-23
restricting 3-23
EMS
basic EMS features 1-3
EMS sub-codes
entering 3-14
EMS translation codes
mapping 4-24
equipment actions
creating 4-27
F
field labels
changing 4-61, 5-8
editing 5-8
hiding 4-61, 5-8
Fields
hiding 4-59
making invisible 4-58
repositioning 4-58–4-59
selecting mandatory 4-58–4-59
selecting recommended 4-58–4-59
fields
editing 5-8
hiding 5-8
reposition 5-8
filtering data 1-10
filtering user data 1-10
Findings
occupancy 4-8
FireRMS
documentation set 0-xi
introduction 0-xi
Quick Reference E-1
FireRMS Client software
updating automatically 6-3
Flow Calculator Tools 1-6
FMZ code 4-6, 4-20
Font size
descreasing 1-6
increasing 1-6
on the FireRMS desktop
changing 1-6
Full Access A-1
Setting Up the Database
using a different 5-9
disabling automatic incident numbers 5-3
Disclosure languages
creating 4-48
Disclosure signatures 4-49
entering 4-49
Disclosure titles
entering 4-48
Disclosures 7-2
creating 4-47
deleting 4-48
modifying 4-49
Disclosures tab
displaying 4-49
Division 1-11
documentation set 0-xi
DOT Identifier 3-17
H
How do I
list of procedures E-1
Hydrant actions
creating 4-2
Hydrant activities
assigning to staff 4-4
Hydrant numbering scheme
selecting 4-5
Hydrants
customizing 4-1
I
Import/Export Tools 1-6
Incident billing rates
setting 4-21
Index-3
incident numbers
disabling automatic 5-3
entering manually 5-3
Incident reports
setting defaults for 4-23
Incidents 1-3, 7-6
customizing 4-1
information highlighting 0-xiii
Initial Credential requirements
setting 4-42
initial setup steps 1-7
initiate design mode 4-57, 4-59
Installing FireRMS 2-1
installing software
client 2-2
server 2-3
Introduction 0-xi
L
label 4-54
license keys
FireRMS
entering 6-2
Supplies & Inventory
entering 6-2
Limited Access A-1
Logical Hierarchy 1-10
Login information
changing 6-3, 6-13
Login security
setting 5-3
M
main FireRMS desktop window 1-2
mandatory fields
displaying 5-14
selecting 5-8
Master Name Index D-1
Mobile device
steps for using 7-1
Mobile Disclosures 1-3
mobile incidents
Index-4
reconciling 1-1, 7-2
Mobile Inspections 1-2
Mobile Preferences 1-2
Mobile product
information about 7-1
Mobile software 1-2
modify field selections 1-9
N
network reporting
setting 5-12
No Access A-1
Not Assigned 1-12
NT Login feature
using 5-1
numbering
Hydrants 4-5
numbering scheme
Occupancy 4-19
Numbers tab field descriptions 3-27
O
Objective Explorer
setting defaults 4-45
Objectives
creating 4-33
defining 4-33
record 4-43
setting default 4-43
objects
modifying in design mode 5-8
Occupancies
commercial and residential 1-5
customizing 4-1
Occupancies Activities default view
setting 4-6
Occupancy assignments
entering staff for 4-9
Occupancy code groups
retiring 4-15
Occupancy codes
retiring 4-14
FireRMS Administrator’s Guide
P
Permissions
resetting in SQL utilities 4-56
Permits
Hazmat 4-11
occupancy-related 4-11
System 4-11
Personnel
adding 3-21
adding employees 1-5
Personnel Basic Info tab field descriptions 3-22
Personnel module 5-6
limiting access to 5-6
Product features 1-6
Properties
changing 4-58
Protect Daybook 5-3
Protect Desktop 5-3
Protocols
designing custom 4-45
Publish tabs 4-56
Published tabs
modifying 4-56
Q
Query Tool 1-6
Quick Reference E-1
R
recommended fields
displaying 5-14
selecting 5-8
Reconcile tab 1-1, 7-2
Refresh Timer
turning off 5-4
Renewal Credential requirements
setting 4-42
Report button 4-55
reporting
central
selecting 5-12
Web
selecting 5-13
Reports
creating custom 4-55
linking to Reports button 4-55
restricting access to data 1-10
retiring occupancy code groups 4-15
Setting Up the Database
unretiring 4-15
Occupancy findings
creating 4-8
creating list of standards linked to 4-12
Occupancy group
retiring 4-14
Occupancy Numbering Scheme
choosing a 4-19
Occupancy-related letters
creating templates for 4-16
Occupancy-related permits
creating list of 4-11
organization, book 0-xiv
Other Entries
customizing 4-1
tasks assigned to personnel 1-4
Other entries defaults
customizing 4-50
S
Same as Initial button 4-42
Scheduling & Tracking
scheduling activities and training 1-5
Security
creating groups 3-31
Security Groups
defining 3-31
server software
installing 2-3
Set To Current User 1-12
Shift colors
adding 3-9
Shift letters
adding 3-9
Shift patterns
Index-5
entering 3-6
Shift tab field descriptions 3-8
Skills
creating 4-33
defining 4-33
record 4-43
setting default 4-43
Software
installing 2-2
software
3rd party utilities 2-2
version number 2-4
Spell check dictionary
specifying 5-8–5-9
SQL server 1-1
staff available for assignment
creating 4-29
Standards
creating 4-31
link to findings 4-12
Local 4-12, 4-31
National 4-12, 4-31
State 4-12, 4-31
Station 1-11
Streets
entering 3-28
Streets tab field descriptions 3-29
Structure tab field descriptions 3-6
Sub-categories
adding 4-31
support ??–E-3
contacting E-2
contract E-1
custom solutions E-2
hours of operation E-2
System information 6-1
viewing 6-1
T
Tab Creator 4-53
Tabs
Advanced EMS
displaying alternate versions 4-52
Index-6
changing labels 4-51
changing sort order 4-51
hiding 4-51
tabs
customizing 4-51
Template field selections 4-17
Templates
create for occupancy-related letters 4-16
text box 4-54
Training
classes 1-3
customizing 4-1
training 4-31
Treatment Flow 4-46
typographical conventions 0-xiii
U
updating FireRMS client software
automatically 6-3
Upgrading FireRMS 2-1
V
Vehicles & Equipment
creating records for 1-5
Vehicles and Equipment
customizing 4-1
W
Web reporting
selecting 5-13
Welcome Wizard
closing after setup 3-27
turning on/off 5-3
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement